This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Contact ratings and lamp voltage can be limited by the type of mounting. i.e. printed circuit termination might not carry full current because of the printed circuit board tracing.
Contact Blocks Only
Type Contact Arrangement Catalog Number
For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination.
N.O. DU10N.C. DU01
N.O. – N.C. DU11N.O. – N.O. DU20N.C. – N.C. DU02
Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9.
For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. DUFPrinted circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9. DUFB
For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs. DVFFor soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator. DVFBRibbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator. DRF
Module With Lamp Holder And Contacts
TypeContact
Arrangement6 to 120 V, 1.2 Watt Max.
d
Momentary Maintained
k
For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination.
Engraving field is 16 mm x 22 mm. Factory engraving limited to 3 lines of 12 characters (including spaces). Black letters on silver field.
Order must specify standard package quantity or multiples of that quantity.
Type Std. Pkg. Qty. Catalog NumberLegend Plate Holder with Blank PlateUse with D5, D6 bezel 25 Z215
Legend Plate Holder Only, Use with D5D6 bezel 25 Z213
Legend Plate Holder with Blank LegendUse with D5, D6 bezel 25 Z222
Legend Plate Holder Only, Use with D5D6 bezel 25 Z221
Blank Plate without Holder (For use with all holders) 25 Z214Yellow Contrast Plate-Round, 50 mm 1 Z211Yellow Contrast Plate-Rectangular, 25 mm x 50 mm 1 Z212
Pilot Lights, Push-To-Test and Remote Test Pilot Lights
Class 9001 Type J compact pilot lights are designed to be mounted in a .69" (11/16") diameter mounting hole. Each terminal will accept up to two #14 AWG wires (CU only). Type J compact pilot lights meet NEMA Type 4 (watertight) and NEMA Type 13 (oiltight) requirements. Type JT push-to-test pilot lights have contacts built into the encapsulated body. Type JTR remote test pilot lights have dual inputs for one push remote testing – all you need is a push button with a current rating equal to or greater than the total lamp draw. Type JTR remote test pilot lights can also be energized from two separate input signals of the same voltage and polarity. This is done by wiring the “test” terminal to the second input signal.
(1) See Page 18 for replacement LED lamps. For other voltage LED lamps contact local field office.k Supplied with “plastic” color caps. If “glass” color caps are desired, substitute G26, R26, etc., for G29, R29, etc. Example:
JP1G26, JP1R26, etc. To order a pilot light with color cap not listed above, add the color cap type number from the table below to the basic pilot light number. Example: For a standard 120 volt transformer style pilot light with a plastic amber color cap, order a 9001JP1A29. LED lamps are only for use with plastic red, green or yellow color caps.
Replacement Parts - Class 9001, Type JType Catalog Number
Ring Nut 6512909601Locking Thrust Washer 6512909201Trim Washer 6512909301Rubber Sealing Washer 6512901801Note:Octagonal ringnuts can be tightened with standard tools, or use the reverse end of Square D wrench
Class 9001 Type K95.
Type A B C
JTR1 2.83" 1.20" .93"
JP, JT, JTR31
through JTR38
2.34" 1.11" .84"
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType O - Pilot LightsDescription and Selection
GeneralThis new Telemecanique range of LED pilot lights meets the very latest requirements in signalling techniques.
Because of their small size, Ø8 and Ø12 mm fixing pilot lights are particularly suitable for the following applications:
• mounting on small control stations.• shallow depth mounting.• large number of signalling units on a control station (low power dissipation).Small diameter LED pilot lights also have sealed front faces (IP 65 option available). An unsealed Ø8 mm fixing model with protruding LED and black bezel (aesthetic appearance) is also offered.
Advantages:LED pilot lights have many advantages:
• very long life and so low maintenance costs (bulb test no longer required).• highly resistant to shocks, vibrations and over-voltage.• low power consumption which, for example, allows compatibility with programmable controller outputs
by parallel connection with the load, to give a direct indication of output state.• very high reliability.Quick fixing by means of tags for soldered clips for Ø8 mm type, or threaded connectors Ø12 mm type. Safe connection due to integral ballast resistor and reverse polarity protection device.
Dimensions
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 230.
Conforming to standards IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660-200.
Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” treatment.
Ambient temperature Operation: -25 °C to + 70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F). Storage: -40 °C to + 70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F).
Electric shock protection Class III conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Degree of protection IP 40 (IP 65 with seal) conforming to IEC 529 and NF C 20-010.
Current consumption 25 mA.
Rated Insulation voltage 50 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110.
Life Can exceed 100,000 hours.
Voltage limits including ripple (---—) 0.8 UN ≤ U ≤1.2 Un.
Terminal referencing Polarity marked + – conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
Cabling
XVLA1kk, XVLA2kk: tags for 2.8 x 0.5 mm quick connectors, also for soldered connections.XVLA3kk: threaded connectors, clamping, capacity: min. 1 - 26 AWG solid or stranded, max. 1 - 16 AWG solid or stranded.
E
M12 x 1
10
6 45
O 1
6
O 12, with lens incorporated,protected LED XVL-A3
E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 6 mmE - mounting plate thickness 1 to 8 mm
O 8, with lens incorporated,protected LED XVL-A2
E
M8 x 0,5
12
341.5
O10
E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 8 mm
LED pilot lightsO8, with black bezel,visible LED XVL-A1..
E
M8 x 0.5
12
321.5
O12
MarkingFile LR 44087Class 3211 03
File E164353CCN NKCR2
All dimensions are in mms. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXVL Miniature LED Pilot LightsSelection and Accessories
IEC-947-5-1, EN60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660-200, UL 508, CSA C 22-2 No. 14.
Approvals
CSA and UL:
push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600 - Q600, pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max); pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V)ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, BUREAU, VERITAS, SAHKOTARKASTUSKESKUS, GL, DNV, LROS
XD2P, standard version:
CSA A600-Q600, LROS.
Protective treatment Standard Version: “TC” (all climates).
Ambient temperature Storage: -40
°
C to +70
°
C (-40
°
F to +158
°
F.). Operating: -25
°
C to +70
°
C (-13
°
F to +158
°
F.).
Resistance to vibration 60 mm diameter mushroom head: 8 g. Other push buttons: 15 g. Small joystick controllers: 5g (from 40 to 50 Hz) conforming to IEC 68-2-6.
Resistance to shock Push buttons: 70 g. Mushroom head push buttons: 15 g.Selector switches: 120 g. Conforming to IEC 68-2-27.
Electric shock protection
XB2B, XD2P:
Class 1, conforming to IEC 536 and NF 20-030.
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 529 and NEC 20-010.
NEMA ratings XB2B: 1, 2, 4, 4x, 12K, 13, XB2B, XD2P.IP 65: flush and protecting, illuminated and non-illuminated push buttons (mounted).IP 40: double-headed push buttons (IP 65 on request).
Mechanical life
Push buttons -- 3 million operations. Latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations. Illuminated selector switches: 100,000 operations. (The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the warranty offered on this product, please refer to the Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.)
Contact block characteristics
Nominal thermal current 10 A conforming to IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No. 14, VDE 0660 part 2, NEMA Type A600-Q600.
Nominal insulation voltage 500V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110, IEC 158-1, 600V conforming to UL 508, 600v conforming toCSA 22-2 No. 14.
Insulation catagory Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.
Contact operation Slow-make N.O. or slow-break N.C. N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1 Section 3.
Contact resistance
≤
25 m
Ω
conforming to: NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 225-7 category 3.
Operating force Flush or projecting push buttons - with 1 NO contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 NC contact: 1.8 lbAdditional contacts - N.O.: add 1 lb - N.C.: add 0.7 lb.
Terminal referencing Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuses, g1 or N conforming to IEC 269-1 and VDE 0660-200.
Key release operators come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 30. For switches keyed with different keys, add the suffixes shown in the table below (no change in price). For other key numbers, contact local field office.
j
Trigger action mushroom heads are "tamper proof" whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.
Yellow Contrast Plates
Yellow Contrast Plates comply with EN418 of the European Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC.
Operator
Type Size Color Catalog Number
Mushroom headmomentary
30 mm
Black ZA2BC24Green ZA2BC34Red ZA2BC44
Yellow ZA2BC54Blue ZA2BC64
40 mm
Black ZA2BC2Green ZA2BC3Red ZA2BC4
Yellow ZA2BC5Blue ZA2BC6
60 mmBlack ZA2BR2Red ZA2BR4
Mushroom headLatchingPush-Pull
30 mmBlack ZABT24Red ZABT44
40 mmBlack ZA2T2Red ZA2BT4
60 mmBlack ZA2BX2Red ZA2BX4
Mushroom headLatchingTurn to Release
30 mm Red ZA2BS4440 mm Red ZA2BS5460 mm Red ZA2BS64
Mushroom headLatching, Turn to Release Trigger Action
f
30 mm Red ZA2BS83440 mm Red ZA2BS844
Mushroom headLatchingKey to Release
j
30 mm Red ZA2BS7440 mm Red ZA2BS1460 mm Red ZA2BS24
Mushroom headLatching, Key to Release Trigger Action
fj
30 mm Red ZA2BS93440 mm Red ZA2BS944
Key Number Suffix
421 12
458A 10
520 14
3131A 20
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter
Text LanguageCatalog Number
Text LanguageCatalog Number
Blank N/A ZB2BY9101 Blank N/A ZB2BY8101Emergency Stop English ZB2BY9330 Emergency Stop English ZB2BY8330Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY9130 Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY8130Not Aus German ZB2BY9230 Not Aus German ZB2BY8230Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY9430 Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY8430Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY9630 Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY8630
When ordering extended lever, substitute “J” for “D” in part number (No additional cost).Example: ZA2BD3 becomes ZA2BJ3
f
Key selector switches come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 30.For other key numbers contact local field office.
For switches keyed with different keys, add the following suffixes:
Non-illuminated selector switches
Type Positions, ActionCatalogNumber
Standard handleor extended lever
t
2-maintained ZA2BD22-spring return from right to left ZA2BD43-maintained ZA2BD33-spring return to center from left and right ZA2BD53-spring return from right to center ZA2BD83-spring return from left to center ZA2BD7
Key selectors
Type Positions, ActionKey
removalCatalogNumber
Key switch
f
2-maintained Left ZA2BG22-maintained Left, Right ZA2BG42-spring return right to left Left ZA2BG63-maintained All ZA2BG03-maintained Center ZA2BG33-maintained Left, Right ZA2BG53-maintained Left ZA2BG93-spring return to centerfrom left and right Center ZA2BG7
N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.
+
Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
t
Select proper digit for desired primary voltage:
1
(24 V 50/60 Hz)
2
(48 V 50/60 Hz)
3
(110/120 V 50/60 Hz)
94
(220/240 V 60 Hz)
95
(440/480 V 60 Hz)
98
(550/600 V 60 Hz).
f
Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field for details.
u
Non- illuminated devices can be configured with 6 contact blocks maximum (3 decks of 2).
j
Illuminated devices can be configured with a light module and 4 contact blocks maximum (2 decks of 2).
s
Contact blocks and light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number. Example: ZB2BE101 becomes ZB2BE1013.
Contact block assembliescontact blocks and mounting collar for XA2B pilot devices
s
DescriptionContacts
N.O. N.C.Catalog Number
1 Contact block1 - ZA2BZ101
- 1 ZA2BZ102
2 Contact blocks
2 - ZA2BZ103
- 2 ZA2BZ104
1 1 ZA2BZ105
Additional contact blocks
u
Description Contact Type Catalog Number
For converting body/contact assemblies to 3, 4, 5 or 6 contacts max or replacing 1st or 2nd contact blocks
N.O. Standard ZB2BE101
N.C. Standard ZB2BE102
Mounting collar onlyfor attaching contact block(s) to operator heads
ZA2BZ009
Light module assembliesmounting collar with light module and contact blocks for XA2B pilot devices
s
DescriptionContacts
N.O. N.C.Catalog Number
Direct supply incandescent bulb included (AC/DC)
j
Without contacts 1 - ZA2BW061+
1 Contact block - 1 ZA2BW062+
2 Contact blocks
2 - ZA2BW063+
- 2 ZA2BW064+
1 1 ZA2BW065+
Transfomer type (1.2 VA/6 V incandescent bulb included) (AC only)
fj
Without contacts
1 - ZA2BW0
t
1
1 Contact block - 1 ZA2BW0
t
2
2 Contact blocks
2 - ZA2BW0
t3
- 2 ZA2BW0t4
1 1 ZA2BW0t5
Resistor type (130 V incandescent bulb included) 220-250 V supply2 Contact blocks 1 1 ZA2BW075
Legend plate carriers (30 x 40 mm) for XA2B pilot devicesComplete with “snap-in” (27 x 8 mm) legend plates, with standard text.“Start” functions: white characters on black. “Stop” functions: white characters on red.
Standard textsCatalogNumber
Standard textsCatalog Number
Auto-Hand ZA2BZ32364 Off ZA2BZ32312
Auto-O-Hand ZA2BZ32385 On ZA2BZ32311
Off-On ZA2BZ32367 Open ZA2BZ32313
Auto ZA2BZ32115 Power On ZA2BZ32326
Close ZA2BZ32314 Reset ZA2BZ32323
Down ZA2BZ32308 Reverse ZA2BZ32306
Emergency Stop ZA2BZ32330 Run ZA2BZ32334
Fast ZA2BZ32328 Slow ZA2BZ32327
Forward ZA2BZ32305 Start ZA2BZ32303
Hand ZA2BZ32316 Stop ZA2BZ32304
Inch ZA2BZ32321 Up ZA2BZ32307
Hand-O-Auto ZA2BZ32387
Description ColorCatalogNumber
Complete with “snap-in”(27 x 8 mm) legend plates, blank
Black or red background ZA2BZ32101
White or yellow background ZA2BZ32102
Legend plate carriers only ZA2BZ32
Snap in blank only (27 X 8 mm)Black or red background ZA2BY4101
White or yellow background ZA2BY4102
Legend plate carriers (30 x 50 mm) for XA2Bf pilot devices
Description ColorCatalogNumber
Complete with “snap-in”(27 x 18 mm) legend plates, blank
Black or red background ZA2BZ33101
White or yellow background ZA2BZ33102
Legend plate carriers only ZA2BZ33
Snap in blank only (27 x 18 mm)Black or red background ZA2BY5101
White or yellow background ZA2BY5102
Legend carrier for square aspect head (30 x 40 mm) for XA2B pilot devices
With “snap-in” blank legend plateBlack or red background ZA2BZ34101
White or yellow background ZA2BZ34102
Legend plate carriers only ZA2BZ34
No legend square aspect ring ZA2BZ31
Legend carrier for square aspect head (30 x 50 mm) for XA2B pilot devices
With “snap-in” blank legend plateBlack or red background ZA2BZ35101
White or yellow background ZA2BZ35102
Legend plate carriers only ZA2BZ35
Standard textZA2BZ32326
30 x 40 mmCarrier only
ZA2BZ32
30 x 50 mmZA2BZ33
30 x 40 mmSquare aspect
ZA2BZ34
30 x 50 mmSquare aspect
ZA2BZ35
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXA2B 22 mmAccessories and Replacement Parts
+ Complete lens part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (1-white, 3-green, 4-red, 5-amber, 6-blue, 7-clear). Example ZB2BV013 green standard pilot lens. Note: Jeweled lens not available in white.
j Complete boot part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (2-black, 3-green, 4-red, 5-yellow, 6-blue). Example ZB2BP013 green silicon boot.
AccessoriesType Description Catalog Number
Guards/Locks 60 mm mushroom guard (black plastic)no padlocking provision ZB2BZ19
Closing plates22 mm
Black plastic ZB2SZ3
Gray plastic ZB2SZ4
Blue metallic ZB2SZ2
Miscellaneous Accessories Add on push-on/push-off mechanism ZB2BZ21
Tools
Bulb extractor for use with BA9s XBFX13
Ring nut wrench ZA2BZ905
Lense removal key ZB2BZ8
Mylar circularlegends for use withtransparent flushhead operatorsSee page 21
No text ZB2BY1101
O ZBZBY1146
I ZBZBY1147
Auto ZB2BY1115
Hand ZB2BY1316
Off ZB2BY1312
On ZB2BY1311
Start ZB2BY1303
Stop ZB2BY1304
Forward ZB2BY1305
Reverse ZB2BY1306
Replacement PartsType Description Catalog Number
Replacement lenses
Lens – standard pilot light ZB2BV01k
Lens kit – standard pilot light (includes lens, diffuser and gasket) ZB2BV02k
Lens – pilot light (jeweled for LED and Neon) ZB2BV01k3
Lens – flush illuminated push buttons ZB2BW91k
Lens – flush illuminated push buttons (jeweled for LED and Neon) ZB2BW93k3
Lens – extended push buttons ZB2BW93k
Lens – extended push buttons (jeweled for LED and Neon) ZB2BW93k3
Lens – push-to-test ZB2BV01k1
Lens – rectangle for ZB2BW80000 series (2 button with indicator) ZB2BW90k
Lens – 40 mm mushroom W4042926400k
Replacement ring nut Standard nut for all operators ZB2BBZ901
Replacement bootsReplacement silicon boot for ZB2BP series operators ZB2BP01j
Replacement neoprene booty for ZB2BP series operators ZB2BP02j
Replacement keys Replacement key for standard selector switches and key release mushroom operators. Qty. 1- Ronis key #455. Q99900901
Key #421 Qty. 1 Q99900911
Key #458A Qty. 1 Q99900910
Key #520 Qty. 1 Q99900912
Key #3131A Qty. 1 Q99900915
ZB2-BV...
ZB2-BW93.
ZB2-BP012
ZA2-BZ901
Closing plateZB2SZ3
ZB2BVkkk
ZB2BW93k
ZB2BP012
ZA2 BZ901
Mylar circular legend
Push on/push offmechanism
ZB2BZ21
Q99900901
Q99900901
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXA2B 22 mmDimensions
The XALB line of standard push button wall stations are in IEC Type IP65, plastic enclosures for indoor and outdoor use. The units have UL, CSA, and IEC approvals. The enclosures are provided with 4 to 8 cable entry knockouts. Two knockouts are in the base. A cross reference between the base (contact blocks) and the cover (operators) is provided to avoid confusion.
* Yellow cover per EN418 of European Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC
Operators NameplatesWiring
diagramPart
Number
1 push button Start XALB101
1 push button Stop XALB111
1 push button(mushroom head) N/A XALB164
1 push button(mushroom head)
Turn to release
N/A*
XALJ174
1 push button(mushroom head)
Turn to release“No Tease”
XALJ178
1 push button(mushroom head)
key to releaseXALJ184
1 push button(mushroom head)
key to release“No Tease”
XALJ188
2 push buttons StartStop XALB211
2 push buttons ForwardReverse XALB221
1 pilot light2 push buttons
StartStop XALB371
3 push buttonsForwardReverse
StopXALB311
3 push buttonsUp
DownStop
XALB321
3 push buttonsOpenCloseStop
XALB341
120V max
Marking
File LR 44087
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.
File E164353CCN NKCR
Class 3211 03
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXALB
XALB Wall Stations use ZA2B operators, special base mounted contact blocks and light modules. Legends used are ZB2BYkk type from page 57.
j Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. Replacement bulbs available on page 24. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
f Base mounted transformer light modules require a separately mounted transformer which mounts in the open next to the light module (hole blanking plug provided).
t Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field office for details.
Empty EnclosuresDescription Number of Holes Part Number
Light grey lid withdark grey base
1 XALB01
2 XALB02
3 XALB03
4 XALB04
5 XALB05
Yellow lid with grey base 1 XALJ01
Contact Blocks (base mounted)Description Symbol Function Part Number
Slow make 1 N/O XENL1111
Slow break, direct opening 1 N/C XENL1121
Contact Blocks (operator mounted)Description Symbol Function Part Number
Square D offers specialized control packages through the Modified Panels Group. Assemblies can be manufactured to meet your specific design criteria, incorporating special dimensions, enclosure types, and component makeup.
Specific control operator needs can be satisfied with products ranging fromstandard 30 mm push buttons to printed circuit board mounted pilot device assemblies.
In addition, Square D offers the widest variety of control products in numerous enclosure types to meet your electrical, environmental, anddimensional needs. Use of CAD designs, prototype assembly before production, and personalized service insures the product you receive will be exactly what you ordered...Guaranteed.
For additional information or receive a personalized proposal, contact your local Square D sales office.
Conformity to standards XB2B, XD2P: UL 508, IEC 947-5-1, EN60947-5-1, IEC337-1, IEC337-2, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE1003,BS 4794, VDE 0660-200, CSA C 22-2 No. 14, CSA C 22-2 No. 66
Approvals
UL:
push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600-Q600;pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max.);pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V)
CSA:
push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600-Q600.pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max.);pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V).ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, BUREAU VERITAS, SAHKOTARKASTUSKESKUS, GL, DNV, LROS
XD2P,
standard version: CSA A600-Q600, LROS.
Protective treatment Standard version: TC “All climates”
Ambient temperature Operating: -25
°
C to +70
°
C (-13
°
F to +158
°
F) Storage: -40
°
C to +70
°
C (-40
°
F to +158
°
F )
Resistance to vibration 60 mm diameter mushroom head: 8 g. Other push buttons: 15 g. Small joystick controllers: 5 g (from 40 to 50 Hz)Conforming to IEC 68-2-6.
Resistance to shock Push buttons: 70 g. Mushroom head push-buttons: 15 g. Selector switches: 200 g. Conforming to IEC 68-2-27.
Protection against electric shock
XB2B, XD2P:
Class 1, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Degree of protectionconforming to IEC 529and NF C 20-010
NEMA ratings XB2B: 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12K, 13, XB2B, XD2P: IP 65: flush and protecting, illuminated and non-illuminated push buttons (mounted). IP 66: booted and mushroom head push buttons, selector switches, pilot lights and small joystick controllers (mounted). IP 40: double- headed push buttons (IP 65 on request).
Mechanical life Push buttons—3 million operations (Latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations. Illuminated selector switches: 100,000 operations). The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product, please refer to Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.
Contact block characteristics
Nominal thermal current 10 A conforming to IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No. 14, VDE 0660 part 2, NEMA Type A600-Q600.
Nominal insulation voltage 500 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110, IEC 158-1, 600 V conforming to UL 508, 600 V conforming to CSA 22-2 No. 14.
Insulation catagory Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.
Contact operation Slow- make N.O. or slow-break N.C. N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN60947-5-1section 3.
Contact resistance
≤
25 m
Ω
conforming to: NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 225-7 category 3.
Operating force Flush or projecting push buttons - with 1 NO contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 NC contact: 1.8 lbAdditional contacts - N.O.: add 1 lb - N.C.: add 0.7 lb.
Terminal referencing Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuses, Gl or N conforming to IEC 269-1and VDE 0660-200.
Key release operators come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 56. For other key numbers contact local field office.
f
Trigger action mushroom heads are “tamper proof” whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.
Guards / Locks
Type Size Color CatalogNumber
Metal 40 mm with finger cutout and 7 mm holes for padlocking
Red
ZB2BZ1804
Plastic 60 mm (for 40 mm turn to release)
Yellow
ZB2BZ1905
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter
Text Language Catalog Number Text Language Catalog Number
Blank N/A ZB2BY9101 Blank N/A ZB2BY8101Emergency Stop English ZB2BY9330 Emergency Stop English ZB2BY8330Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY9130 Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY8130Not Aus German ZB2BY9230 Not Aus German ZB2BY8230Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY9430 Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY8430Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY9630 Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY8630
When ordering extended lever subsitute J for D. Example:
ZB2BD2
becomes
ZB2BJ2
.
f
Key selector switches come with Ronis #455 keys (quanitity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 21. For switches keyed with different keys, add the suffixes shown in the table below (no change in price). For other key numbers contact local field office.
Lever Operators
Type Number of positions, actions Lever Color Catalog Number
Type Number of positions, actions, key removal Catalog Number
Key switch
f
2-maintained key removal from left ZB2BG22-maintained key removal from left or right ZB2BG42-spring return from right to left, key removal from left ZB2BG63-maintained key removal from center ZB2BG33-maintained key removal from left and right ZB2BG53-maintained key removal from left ZB2BG93-maintained key removal from all positions ZB2BG03-spring return left or right to center, key removal from center ZB2BG73-spring return left to center key removal right ZB2BG13-spring return right to center key removal center ZB2BG83-spring return right to center key removal left ZB2BG08
Units come with 1 N.O. contact in each direction. Screw terminals. Contact blocks cannot be added or removed from the above arrangements. For other requirements, contact local sales office.
f
Customer to supply potentiometer, unit accepts 1/4" diameter, 1.625" (43-47 mm) length shaft potentiometer.
These 2 direction and 4 direction position charts are viewed from behind the panel, thereby reversing east and west positions. When lever is moved away from center, only one contact changes from N.O. to N.C. The other contact blocks in the swtich are unaffected.
Operators
Type ColorCatalogNumber
Wobble sticksBlack ZB2BB2
Red ZB2BB4
Potentiometer operator
f
Black ZB2BD922
Joysticks
t
Contacts supplied
2-maintained XD2PA12
2-spring return XD2PA22
4-maintained XD2PA14
4-spring return XD2PA24
Two step push buttons (contacts supplied)
TypeContact1st step
Contact2nd step
CatalogNumber
Flush head
N.O. N.O. XB2BA
k
41
N.O. N.C. XB2BA
k
42
N.O.+N.C. N.O. XB2BA
k
43
N.O.+N.C. N.O.+N.C. XB2BA
k
44
k
Replace
k
with desired color head. (1-white, 2-black, 3-green, 4-red, 5-yellow, 6-blue).
Two position toggle switch (maintained)
Type ColorCatalogNumber
Two position toggle switchNEMA Type 1 only Black ZB2BD28
t Quick connect contact blocks will accept commercially available female quick slide connector (1 x 0.25" or 2 x 0.11")f Non-illuminated devices can be configured with 6 contacts maximum (3 decks of 2). N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.
Mounting base with contact block(s) “Screw clamp connection”
N.O. N.C.
Type ContactsN.O. N.C. Catalog Number
1 Contact Block1 - ZB2BZ101
- 1 ZB2BZ102
2 Contact Blocks
2 - ZB2BZ103
- 2 ZB2BZ104
1 1 ZB2BZ105
Additional contact blocks
Type ContactsN.O. N.C. Catalog Number
For making up body assemblieswith 3, 4, 5 or max. of 6 contact blocksor replacing 1st or 2nd contact blockf
1 - ZB2BE101
- 1 ZB2BE102
Mounting base with contact block(s) “Quick connect” t
TypeContacts
N.O. N.C.Catalog Number
1 Contact Block1 - ZB2BZ1013
- 1 ZB2BZ1023
2 Contact Blocks
2 - ZB2BZ1033
- 2 ZB2BZ1043
1 1 ZB2BZ1053
Additional contact blocks “Quick Connect” *
TypeContacts
N.O. N.C.Catalog Number
For making up body assemblieswith 3, 4, 5 or max. of 6 contact blocksor replacing 1st or 2nd contact blockf
t Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.f Light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number.
Example: ZB2BV6 becomes ZB2BV63.
Pilot light heads
Type ColorCatalogNumber
Standard
White ZB2BV01
Green ZB2BV03
Red ZB2BV04
Amber ZB2BV05
Blue ZB2BV06
Clear ZB2BV07
Special lens for neon and LED bulbs
Green ZB2BV033
Red ZB2BV043
Amber ZB2BV053
Blue ZB2BV063
Clear ZB2BV073
Glass lens (NEMA Type 1 only)
Green ZB2BV032
Red ZB2BV042
Amber ZB2BV052
Clear ZB2BV072
Pilot light modules f
TypeCatalogNumber
Direct supply (incandescent bulb included)t (AC/DC) ZB2BV6t
Transformer type (1.2 VA/6 V bulb included) (AC only)
24 V: 50-60 Hz ZB2BV1
48 V: 50-60 Hz ZB2BV2
110 V: 50 Hz 110-120 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV3
127 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV91
220 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV4
240 V: 50 Hz 220-240 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV94
380 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV5
415 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV9
440-480 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV95
500 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV8
550-660 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV98
Resistor type (130 V bulb included).
220/250 V (AC/DC) ZB2BV7
Replacement Bulbs................................................................................Page 56Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmIlluminated Operators
M White XB2BN111 XB2BN112M Green XB2BN311 XB2BN312M Red XB2BN411 XB2BN412M Amber XB2BN511 XB2BN512M Blue XB2BN611 XB2BN612M Clear XB2BN711 XB2BN712
SR White XB2BN121 XB2BN322SR Red XB2BN421 XB2BN422SR Amber XB2BN521 XB2BN522SR Blue XB2BN621 XB2BN622SR Clear XB2BN721 XB2BN722
IlluminatedDirect supply
M White XB2BN1161 XB2BN1162M Green XB2BN3161 XB2BN3162M Red XB2BN4161 XB2BN4162M Amber XB2BN5161 XB2BN5162M Blue XB2BN6161 XB2BN6162M Clear XB2BN7161 XB2BN7162
SR White XB2BN1261 XB2BN1262SR Green XB2BN3261 XB2BN3262SR Red XB2BN4261 XB2BN4262SR Amber XB2BN5261 XB2BN5262SR Blue XB2BN6261 XB2BN6262SR Clear XB2BN7261 XB2BN7262
IlluminatedTransformer Type 110/120 V
M White XB2BN1131 XB2BN1132M Green XB2BN3131 XB2BN3132M Red XB2BN4131 XB2BN4132M Amber XB2BN5131 XB2BN5132M Blue XB2BN6131 XB2BN6132M Clear XB2BN7131 XB2BN7132
SR White XB2BN1231 XB2BN1232SR Green XB2BN3231 XB2BN3232SR Red XB2BN4231 XB2BN4232SR Amber XB2BN5231 XB2BN5232SR Blue XB2BN6231 XB2BN6232SR Clear XB2BN7231 XB2BN7232
IlluminatedTransformer Type220/240V
M White XB2BN1141 XB2BN1142M Green XB2BN3141 XB2BN3142M Red XB2BN4141 XB2BN4142M Amber XB2BN5141 XB2BN5142M Blue XB2BN6141 XB2BN6142M Clear XB2BN7141 XB2BN7142
SR White XB2BN1241 XB2BN1242SR Green XB2BN3241 XB2BN3242SR Red XB2BN4241 XB2BN4242SR Amber XB2BN5241 XB2BN5242SR Blue XB2BN6241 XB2BN6242SR Clear XB2BN7241 XB2BN7242
Mushroom lens only
White W40429264001Green W40429264003Red W40429264004
t Position status: Position 1 - Pull. Spring return, Position 2- Center, Maintained, Position 3 - Push. Maintained or spring return. f Contacts cannot be modified or interchanged; therefore operators are not sold separately.
+ Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V AC/DC.Note: If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
t Select proper digit for voltage desired: 1 (24 V 50/60 Hz) 2(48 V 50/60 Hz) 3 (110/120 V 50/60 Hz).94 (220/240 V 60 Hz) 95 (440/480 V 60 Hz) 98 (550/600 V 60 Hz).
f Illuminated devices can be configured with a light module and 4 contacts maximum (2 decks of 2).j Additional primary voltages available, contact local field office for details.k Contact blocks and light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number.
Example: ZB2BW061 becomes ZB2BW0613. N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.
Light module assemblies with contact block(s) N.O. N.C.screw clamp connectorsk
Type Contacts Catalog
NumberN.O. N.C.
Direct supply (incandescent bulb included) (AC/DC)
Without contactsf - - ZB2BW060+
1 Contact block 1 - ZB2BW061+
- 1 ZB2BW062+
2 Contact blocks 2 - ZB2BW063+
- 2 ZB2BW064+
1 1 ZB2BW065+
Transformer type (1.2 VA/6 V AC incandescent bulb included) (AC only)j
Without contactsf - - ZB2BW0t0
1 Contact block 1 - ZB2BW0t1
- 1 ZB2BW0t2
2 Contact blocks 2 - ZB2BW0t3
- 2 ZB2BW0t4
1 1 ZB2BW0t5
Resistor type (130 V incandescent bulb included) 220-250 V supply
2 Contact blocks 1 1 ZB2BW075
Additional contact blocks f N.O. N.C.
TypeContacts Catalog
NumberN.O. N.C.For making up body assemblieswith 3 or maximum 4 contact blocksor replacing 1st or 2nd contact block
k Complete lens part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (1- white, 3- green, 4-red, 5- amber, 6- blue, 7-clear). Example ZB2BV013 green standard pilot lens. Note: Jeweled lens not available in white.
j Complete boot part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (2- black, 3- green, 4- red, 5- yellow, 6- blue, 7-clear).Example ZB2BP013 green silicon boot.
Lamps
Type Voltage AC/DC Watts Catalog Number
IncandescentReplacement bulbs (Type BA9s)
6 1.5 DL1CB006
12 2.0 DL1CE012
24 2.0 DL1CE024
48 2.4 DL1CE048
130 2.6 DL1CE130
Neon(use with direct supply light module)
120 - NE51HRT120V
220 - NE51HRT220V
380 - NE51HRT380V
Type Color Voltage Part Number
LED, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks
Green 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0063
Red 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0064
Amber 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0065
Green 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0123
Red 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0124
Amber 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0125
Green 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0243
Red 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0244
Amber 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0245
Green 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1203
Red 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1204
Amber 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1205
LED, BA9s base for retrofitting into transformer Light Modules
Green 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0093
Red 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0094
Amber 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0095
Replacement Lenses, Boots and Keys
Type Description Catalog Number
Replacement lenses
Lens - standard pilot light ZB2BV01k
Lens kit - standard pilot light(includes lens, diffuser & gasket) ZB2BV02k
Lens - pilot light(jeweled for LED & Neon) ZB2BV01k3
Lens - flush illuminated push buttons ZB2BW91k
Lens - flush illuminated push buttons(Jeweled for LED & Neon) ZB2BW93k3
Lens - extended push buttons ZB2BW93k
Lens - extended push buttons(jeweled for LED & Neon) ZB2BW93k3
Lens - push-to-test ZB2BV01k1
Lens - rectangle for ZB2BW80000 series(2 button with indicator) ZB2BW90k
Lens - 40 mm mushroom W4042926400k
Replacement boots
Replacement silicon boot for ZB2BPseries operators ZB2BP01j
Replacement neoprene boot for ZB2BPseries operators ZB2BP02j
Replacement keys
Replacement key for standard selector switches and key release mushroom operators. Qty. 1 - Ronis key #455 Q99900901
Key # 421 Qty. 1 Q99900911
Key # 458A Qty. 1 Q99900910
Key # 520 Qty. 1 Q99900912
Key # 3131A Qty. 1 Q99900915
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mm
a All nameplates are black w/white lettering except “Stop”, “Emergency Stop” and “Reset” which are red w/white lettering.For black “Reset” change final digit of catalog number to 2.
j Please specify lettering when ordering. Two lines with 11 characters (including spaces) maximum on each line.
PVC Standard legend plates 30 x 40 mmTexta Catalog Number Texta Catalog Number
Close ZB2BY2314 On ZB2BY2311Down ZB2BY2308 Off On ZB2BY2367Emergency Stop ZB2BY2330 Open ZB2BY2313Fast ZB2BY2328 Open Close ZB2BY2376Forward ZB2BY2305 Open-O-Close ZB2BY2388For Rev ZB2BY2371 Out ZB2BY2339For-O-Rev ZB2BY2384 Power On ZB2BY2326Hand Off Auto ZB2BY2387 Raise ZB2BY2335High ZB2BY2338 Reset ZB2BY2323High Low ZB2BY2369 Reverse ZB2BY2306In ZB2BY2503 Right ZB2BY2309Inch ZB2BY2321 Run ZB2BY2334Jog For ZB2BY2381 Slow ZB2BY2327Jog Rev ZB2BY2380 Start ZB2BY2303Jog Run ZB2BY2365 Stop ZB2BY2304Left ZB2BY2310 Stop Start ZB2BY2366Low ZB2BY2336 Up ZB2BY2307Lower ZB2BY2337 Up Down ZB2BY2370Man-Auto ZB2BY2372 Up-O-Down ZB2BY2389Off ZB2BY2312
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameterText Language Catalog Number Text Language Catalog Number
Blank N/A ZB2BY9101 Blank N/A ZB2BY8101Emergency Stop English ZB2BY9330 Emergency Stop English ZB2BY8330Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY9130 Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY8130Not Aus German ZB2BY9230 Not Aus German ZB2BY8230Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY9430 Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY8430Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY9630 Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY8630
Type Description Catalog Number
PVC blank legend
Blank Black or red background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2101Blank Yellow or white background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4101
Blank Red background-45 mm x 67.5 mm (For use w/mushroom head operators) ZB2BY5101
Blank Oversized legend-48 mm x 48 mm(For use with XB2 operators) XBCY22011
Blank Black or red background- 30 mm x 48 mm(For use w/2 position joysticks) ZD2GY2201
Metal legend plates
Silver 30 x 40 mm ZB2BY201130 x 50 mm ZB2BY6011
Black 30 x 40 mm ZB2BY202130 x 50 mm ZB2BY6021
Red 30 x 40 mm ZB2BY204130 x 50 mm ZB2BY6041
PVC custom engraved
Special engravingj Black background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2002Special engravingj Red background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2004Special engravingj White background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4001Special engravingj Yellow background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4005Special engravingj Red background, white letters-45 mm x 67.5 mm ZB2BY5004
Mylar Circular LegendsType Description Catalog Number
Mylar circularlegends for use withtransparent flushhead operatorsSee page 39, 48
No text ZB2BY1101O ZBZBY1146I ZBZBY1147Auto ZB2BY1115Hand ZB2BY1316Off ZB2BY1312On ZB2BY1311Start ZB2BY1303Stop ZB2BY1304Forward ZB2BY1305Reverse ZB2BY1306
EMERGENCY
STOP
ZB2BY8330
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmDimensions
Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” and “TH” treatments.
Ambient temperature Operation: -25 °C to +70 °C. Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C.
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13.
Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Flame resistance CSTB: M3, NF C 20-455: 850 °C, IEC 92: 960 °C, UL 94: VO.
Chemical resistance High degree of resistance to acids, bases, sea water, mineral salts, all solvents, petrol, diesel, oils and greases.
Cable entry Undrilled.
Diecast metal enclosures XAPG
Material Zinc alloy (XAPG1-XAP4) Aluminum (XAPG5...)
Approvals Special version: CSA COFFRET 4 and 5, UL COFFRET 1, 3, 4 and 12K.
Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” treatment. Special version: “TH” treatment.
Ambient temperature Operation: -25 °C to +70 °C. Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C.
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4, 13.
Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Chemical resistance Special treatments on request.
Cable entry Tapped entries for cable glands (see dimensions page).
Flush mount enclosures XAPE
Material and color Anodized aluminum front plate. Insulated protective rear cover.
Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” and “TH” treatments.
Ambient temperature Operation: -25 °C to +70 °C. Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C.
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4X, 13.
Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Chemical resistance High degree of resistance to organic acids, diluted mineral acids, salts, alcohol, acetone, chloride and fluoride solvents, oils and petrol.
Cable entry With rear cover: knock-out cable entries.
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXAPA
1. The panel knockout must be 7/8" (22.3 mm) with a panel thickness of 1 to 6 mm (0.04 in to 0.23 in). No anti-rotation notch is required.
2. Insert the operator through the knockout.3. Bayonet lock the operator into the diecast mounting base with a 1/8 clockwise turn.4. Orient the angled fixing screws at 12 and 6 o’clock and alternately tighten the 2 screws.5. The fixing screws will bite into the metal of the inside panel door and provide anti-rotation and a
Overall tolerances of the panel/printed circuit assembly
The sum of the absolute values of the drilling tolerance must not exceed 0.5 mm (0.196”).
– in the horizontal direction X – and in the vertical direction Y
Dimension - A on the panel
Dimensions - B on the panel
- C on the printed circuit - D on the printed circuit
i.e.: t
1
+ t
2
= 0.5 mm max.
Mounting Precautions
a. Panel cut-out diameter: b. When the head and fixing sub-base assembly are fixed and tightened onto the panel, the sub-base (ZA2BZ079 or ZB2BZ079)
must be oriented at a maximum angle
±
5
°.
Fixing sub base screws (ZB2BZ079) must be tightened with same torque value.c. If any of the heads are fitted with legend plate carriers, it is essential that
all
the products are fitted with legend plate carriers.d. Note: the following heads cannot be used with the electrical blocks on page 67:
– double headed push button operators with indicator light ZB2BW8– ZA2C square head operators
Dimensions in mm and inches
(30 mm)
Y
X
(40
mm
)(4
0 m
m )
Ø 22.3
A ± t1A ' ± t1
A '' ± t1
B ±
t1
B '
± t1
B ''
± t1
(0.878" )
(1.181")(30 mm)(1.181")
(1.5
74")
(1.5
74")
+ 0.4 mm0.0 mm
+ 0.016"0.0"
∅ 22.3 mm 0.0 mm+0.4 mm
0.878"+0.016"
0.0"
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Legends for printed circuit drilling and terminal marking
3 different types of drilling are necessary:
drilling for two adjacent blocks
C ± t2C ' ± t2
C '' ± t2
410
8.3
5 4
3
24.6
20
19
15
D ±
t2D
' ±
t2
D ''
± t2
D '
'' ±
t2 C''' ± t2
13
14
21
22
11
14
13
12
4
3
N/Ocontact block
13
14
N/Ccontact/block
21
22
Direct Supplyindicator light
block
X1
X2
Indicator contact"combination"
block
11
12
13
14
X1
X2
Indicator contact"combination"
block
23
24
13
14
X1
X2
Y
X
5 4
2010
4
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
24,60
22,75
26
18,7
5
X1-X2 : bulbs1-2-3-4 : contacts
Socket adapter (ZB2BZ010)
ZB2-BZ010
Fra
nce
30 mm
18
14
13
14
23
24
20
X1
X2
X1
X2
X1
X2
X1
X2
View from the electrical block side: Dimensions in mm.
HOLES FOR CONNECTIONS: Ø 1.5 mm ± 0.1 (Ø 0.059" ± 0.0039")→
→
→CENTERING HOLE OF THE ELECTRICAL BLOCK: Ø 4.5 mm ± 0.1 (Ø 0.177" ± 0.0039")
SCREWDRIVER CLEARANCE HOLE: (Ø 0.275" ± 0.0039") (As Required):for the introduction of an electrical block assembling screw to a sub-base.It is recommended to fit a screw every 90 mm (3.54") horizontally and 120 mm (4.72") vertically
13 14 Terminal marking conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.Indicates the function of the electrical block.
The universal push button operators contain one each of the following color inserts: black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
➁
See table below.
➂
Knob has the words “Emergency Stop” in raised letters highlighted in white for readability. Available in red snap-in mushroom buttons only.
➃
See table below.
➄
These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks – for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Multifunction Operators
Meets UL Type 13/NEMA Type 13 and UL Type 6/NEMA Type 6, which UL and NEMA consider an equivalent to UL Type 4/NEMA Type 4.For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact blocks not included unless otherwise noted.
Description ColorWith 2 N.O.Contacts(2 KA2)
With 1 N.O.& 1 N.C.Contact
(KA2, KA3)
WithoutContacts
⑨
MomentaryDual
Function
Universal
①
Green-RedOther
➁
KR6UH7KR6GRH7KR6
➁
H7
KR6UH37KR6GRH37KR6
➁
H37
KR6UKR6GRKR6
➁
MomentaryInterlocked
Dual Function
Universal
①
Green-RedOther
➁
KR67UH7KR67GRH7KR67
➁
H7
KR67UH37KR67GRH37KR67
➁
H37
KR67UKR67GRKR67
➁
MaintainedInterlocked
Dual Function
Universal
①
Green-RedOther
➁
KR7UH7KR7GRH7KR7
➁
H7
KR7UH37KR7GRH37KR7
➁
H37
KR7UKR7GRKR7
➁
Description Color –Contacts
See
⑩
(KA2, KA3)
WithoutContacts
⑨
Both ButtonsMaintained Interlocked
Assembly
Universal
➂
Other
➃
– KR11UH1KR11
➃
H1KR11UKR11
➃
One Button MomentaryOne Button MaintainedInterlocked Assembly
Universal
➂
Other
➃
– KR12UH1H1KR12
➃
H1H1KR12UKR12
➃
1
5
⁄
8
" Dia. Knob xFor 1
3
⁄
8
" or 2
1
⁄
4
" Dia. Knob - see Includes Type KN379 Legend Plate Marked
Pull To StartPush To Stop
Description Color With 2 N.C. Contacts(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
Universal for KR6, 67, 7 includes 2 inserts each of black, red and green.
➁
Choose one color for each button. R = red, G = green, B = Black.
EXAMPLE: A KR6 with left red and right black = KR6RB
➂
Universal for KR11, 12 includes 2 each of black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, white.
➃
Choose one color for each button from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: A KR11 with top button grey and bottom button orange = KR11ES
➄
Choose one color from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: KR9 with a yellow knob = KR9Y
➅ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 76. EXAMPLE: KR8P➅ with a 277 V 50-60 Hz voltage = KR8P8⑦ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED
uses green knob) or use clear knob..⑧ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.⑨ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. For maximum block usage
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: KR67BB + H8(2 KA3) = KR67BBH8
⑩ KR11UH1 has 1 - KA1 (1 N.O., 1 N.C.) and KR12UH1H1 has 2 - KA1 (2 N.O., 2 N.C.).To obtain a red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob – substitute “R05” in place of “R”. Not available in 13⁄8" or 21⁄4" diameter knobs.For 13⁄8" or 21⁄4" Dia. Knob:a) Order -20 or -21 knob from page 105.b) Order 9001K54 adapter (no charge) - allows -20 or -21 knob to fit on push pull
operators. Voids UL and NEMA Type 6 rating.c) Can order assembled operator by replacing color code with -20 or -21. Example: 9001 KR9R would be 9001KR9R20 or 9001KR9R21. No price adder.
These colors are not available on illuminated push-pull operators.
Other Color Code SelectionColor KR6, KR7, KR67 KR11, KR12 KR8, KR9
BlackRed
GreenBlue
YellowWhite
OrangeClear
AmberGray
BRG–––––––
BRGLYWS––E
B RGLYW
S CA–
11
12
Voltage Assembly Codes See Page 76
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mm
Illuminated Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact block not included unless otherwise noted.
DescriptionVoltage
andFrequency
StyleWith Red Color Cap and 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. Contact
① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage seepage 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.Example: K2L36R20+H2(2 KA1)=K2L36R20H2
➁ Add the Voltage assembly code as chosen from Voltage assembly code table on page 76.Example: K2L➁ with a 240 Vac-dc Voltage = K2L25
➂ On neon Voltages use clear color caps only.➃ The color of the color cap must be the same color as the LED Voltage chosen (i.e., red LED uses
red color cap) or use clear color cap.➄ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table.
Example: K2L25➄ with a blue 13⁄8 mushroom button = K2L25L20➅ The only difference between a no guard (K2L➁) operator and mushroom button operators is the
Shown below is a simplified method of selecting a selectorswitch to meet almost any combination of contact sequences.
Step No. 1Determine the contact sequence(s) required. Set up a target ta-ble like the one shown for the example below.
Step No. 2Look for a cam type common to all sequences in Table 1, 2 or3. For the example above, Table 2 would be used. For the con-tact sequences A(1 0 0), B(0 1 0) and C(0 0 1) of the exampleabove, cam types F and L are common to all 3 sequences.
Step No. 3Next, the cam type common to all the sequences (If severalcam types are common, choose one.) is used to find the oper-ator type number. Go to the proper page number as indicatedin the table below:
If for the example above:
A manual return operator with a standard black knob is required andIf the F cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:
Type K Line – Class 9001 Type KS46B (From page 80)Type SK Line – Class 9001 Type SKS46B (From page 92)
If the L cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:Type K Line – Class 9001 Type KS401B (From page 80)Type SK Line – Class 9001 Type SKS401B (From page 92)
Step No. 4:Determine the contact blocks required by using the same tableused for Step No. 2.
If for the example above:
The F cam type were chosen:A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or 2 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
The L cam type were chosen:A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or a 9001 KA3 mounted on side no. 2would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
Example:Contact
Sequence
A 1 0 0
B 0 1 0
C 0 0 1
0 – contact open1 – contact closed
Number of Positions Push Button Line Page Number
2 Type KType SK 78, 79, 90, 91
3 Type KType SK 80, 81, 92, 93
4 Type KType SK 82, 94
One Type KA1 double circuit block can be used in place of oneType KA2 single circuit block and one Type KA3 single circuitblock mounted on the same side.
Non-Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact block not included unless noted.
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side Left Right Left Right
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1
KA2#2 0 1 1 0
KA1#1
KA3#1 1 0 0 1
KA2#1 0 1 1 0
CAM E D
Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type
Manual Return
Operator Only ①
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 1,2,3)➂➃
KS11KS11BKS11➁
KS11K➂
KS12KS12BKS12➁
KS12K➂
With Contact Block(s)
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors, Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)With 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H2)
KS11BH13KS11BH1KS11BH2
–––
Spring Return from Left Operator Only ①
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 2 only)➃
KS25KS25BKS25➁KS25K2
––––
Spring Return From Right Operator Only ①
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 1 Only)➃
––––
KS34KS34BKS34➁KS34K1
Top View
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
KA1KA3
KA2
KA1KA3
KA2
① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.Example:KS11K1+H13(KA1-SIDE 2)=KS11K1H13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.Example: KS11➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS11FG
➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table.Example: KS11K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS11K2
➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (key only part no. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes are available at no extra cost: E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all operable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions are avail-able.
Example: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number isKS11K2E29.All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased by specifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.Example: K12J35FR+H2(2 KA1) = K12J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from the voltage assembly code table below.Example: K25J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc Voltage = K25J37.
➂ Add the color code as chosen form the knob color table at right.Example: K25J35➂ with a green knob = K25J35G.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – ULTypes 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact block not included unless noted.
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side Left Right Left Right
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1
KA2#2 0 1 1 0
KA1#1
KA3#1 1 0 0 1
KA2#1 0 1 1 0
CAM E D
Illuminated Operators Type Type
Manual Return ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
K11J1K11J1RK11J➁K11J➁
K11J➁➂
K11J➁➂
K12J1K12J1RK12J➁K12J➁
K12J➁➂
K12J➁➂
Spring Return from Left ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
K25J1K25J1RK25J➁K25J➁
K25J➁➂
K25J➁➂
–––––
–
Spring Return From Right ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
–––––
–
K34J1K34J1RK34J➁K34J➁
K34J➁➂
K34J➁➂
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
StandardKnob
GlovedHand Knob
CoinOperated
➂KnobCode
Type➂
KnobCode
Type➂
KnobCode
Type
RedGreenYellowBlueWhiteAmberClear
RGYLWAC
R8G8Y8L8W8A8C8
FRFGFYFLFWFAFC
R24G24Y24L24W24A24C24
TRTGTYTL––
TC
R16G16Y16L16
––
C16
Top View
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
KA1KA3
KA2
KA1KA3
KA2
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type K11J1 Form Y178.
Non-Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return
Operator Only ➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4 through 10) ➂➃
KS42KS42BKS42➁
KS42K➂
KS43KS43BKS43➁
KS43K➂
KS44KS44BKS44➁
KS44K➂
KS45KS45BKS45➁
KS45K➂
KS46KS46BKS46➁
KS46K➂
KS47KS47BKS47➁
KS47K➂
KS49KS49BKS49➁
KS49K➂
KS401KS401BKS401➁
KS401K➂
KS402KS402BKS402➁
KS402K➂
With Contact Block(s)
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors, Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)With 1 KA1 on side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 (H2)
KS42BH13KS42BH1KS42BH2
KS43BH13KS43BH1KS43BH2
KS44BH13KS44BH1KS44BH2
KS45BH13KS45BH1KS45BH2
KS46BH13KS46BH1KS46BH2
KS47BH13KS47BH1KS47BH2
KS49BH13KS49BH1KS49BH2
KS401BH13KS401BH1KS401BH2
KS402BH13KS402BH1KS402BH2
Spring Return from Left to Center
Operator Only ➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 5, 6 or 9 only) ➂➃
KS62KS62BKS62➁
KS62K➂
KS63KS63BKS63➁
KS63K➂
KS64KS64BKS64➁
KS64K➂
KS65KS65BKS65➁
KS65K➂
KS66KS66BKS66➁
KS66K➂
KS67KS67BKS67➁
KS67K➂
KS69KS69BKS69➁
KS69K➂
KS601KS601BKS601➁
KS601K➂
KS602KS602BKS602➁
KS602K➂
Spring Return From Right to Center
Operator Only ➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4, 5 or 7 Only) ➂➃
KS72KS72BKS72➁
KS72K➂
KS73KS73BKS73➁
KS73K➂
KS74KS74BKS74➁
KS74K➂
KS75KS75BKS75➁
KS75K➂
KS76KS76BKS76➁
KS76K➂
KS77KS77BKS77➁
KS77K➂
KS79KS79BKS79➁
KS79K➂
KS701KS701BKS701➁
KS701K➂
KS702KS702BKS702➁
KS702K➂
Spring Return Both Sides to Center
Operator Only ➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 5 Only) ➂➃
KS52KS52BKS52➁KS52K5
KS53KS53BKS53➁KS53K5
KS54KS54BKS54➁KS54K5
KS55KS55BKS55➁KS55K5
KS56KS56BKS56➁KS56K5
KS57KS57BKS57➁KS57K5
KS59KS59BKS59➁KS59K5
KS501KS501BKS501➁KS501K5
KS502KS502BKS502➁KS502K5
Top View
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
KA1KA3
KA2
KA1KA3
KA2
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: KS43K6+H13(KA1-SIDE 2)=KS43K6H13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.EXAMPLE: KS43➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS43FG
➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table below.EXAMPLE: KS43K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS43K6
➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (key only partno. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes are available at noextra cost:E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all op-erable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions areavailable.
EXAMPLE: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number isKS43K6E29.
All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased byspecifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.
Key No. Total Key ChangesAvailable
Master Key (E99)
Part No.
E36 thru E60 25 2941151990
3-Position Switches
➂ Code ➂ Code
4 Yes No No 8 Yes No Yes
5 No Yes No 9 No Yes Yes
6 No No Yes 10 Yes Yes Yes
7 Yes Yes No
OR
OR
OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
K42J1K42J1RK42J➁K42J➁
K42J➁➂K42J➁➂
K43J1K43J1RK43J➁K43J➁
K43J➁➂K43J➁➂
K44J1K44J1RK44J➁K44J➁
K44J➁➂K44J➁➂
K45J1K45J1RK45J➁K45J➁
K45J➁➂K45J➁➂
K46J1K46J1RK46J➁K46J➁
K46J➁➂K46J➁➂
K47J1K47J1RK47J➁K47J➁
K47J➁➂K47J➁➂
K49J1K49J1RK49J➁K49J➁
K49J➁➂K49J➁➂
K401J1K401J1RK401J➁K401J➁K401J➁➂K401J➁➂
K402J1K402J1RK402J➁K402J➁K402J➁➂K402J➁➂
Spring Return Left
ToCenter ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
K62J1K62J1RK62J➁K62J➁
K62J➁➂K62J➁➂
K63J1K63J1RK63J➁K63J➁
K63J➁➂K63J➁➂
K64J1K64J1RK641➁K64J➁
K64J➁➂K64J➁➂
K65J1K65J1RK65J➁K65J➁
K65J➁➂K65J➁➂
K66J1K66J1RK66J➁K66J➁
K66J➁➂K66J➁➂
K67J1K67J1RK67J➁K67J➁
K67J➁➂K67J➁➂
K69J1K69J1RK69J➁K69J➁
K69J➁➂K69J➁➂
K601J1K601J1RK601J➁K601J➁K601J➁➂K601J➁➂
K602J1K602J1RK602J➁K602J➁K602J➁➂K602J➁➂
Spring Return
Right To Center ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
K72J1K72J1RK72J➁K72J➁
K72J➁➂K72J➁➂
K73J1K73J1RK73J➁K73J➁
K73J➁➂K73J➁➂
K74J1K74J1RK74J➁K74J➁
K74J➁➂K74J➁➂
K75J1K75J1RK75J➁K75J➁
K75J➁➂K75J➁➂
K76J1K76J1RK76J➁K76J➁
K76J➁➂K76J➁➂
K77J1K77J1RK77J➁K77J➁
K77J➁➂K77J➁➂
K79J1K79J1RK79J➁K79J➁
K79J➁➂K79J➁➂
K701J1K701J1RK701J➁K701J➁K701J➁➂K701J➁➂
K702J1K702J1RK702J➁K702J➁K702J➁➂K702J➁➂
Spring Return
Both Sides To
Center ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
K52J1K52J1RK52J➁K52J➁
K52J➁➂K52J➁➂
K53J1K53J1RK53J➁K53J➁
K53J➁➂K53J➁➂
K54J1K54J1RK54J➁K54J➁
K54J➁➂K54J➁➂
K55J1K55J1RK55J➁K55J➁
K55J➁➂K55J➁➂
K56J1K56J1RK56J➁K56J➁
K56J➁➂K56J➁➂
K57J1K57J1RK57J➁K57J➁
K57J➁➂K57J➁➂
K59J1K59J1RK59J➁K59J➁
K59J➁➂K59J➁➂
K501J1K501J1RK501J➁K501J➁K501J➁➂K501J➁➂
K502J1K502J1RK502J➁K502J➁K502J➁➂K502J➁➂
Top View
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
KA1KA3
KA2
KA1KA3
KA2
Non-Illuminated only.
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
StandardKnob Gloved
Hand Knob
CoinOperated
KnobCode ➂ Type Knob
Code ➂ Type KnobCode ➂ Type
BlackRed
GreenYellowOrange
BlueWhiteAmberClear
BRGYSLWAC
B11 R8G8Y8
S11 L8W8A8C8
FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC
B25 R24G24Y24
S25 L24W24A24C24
TBTRTGTY–
TL––
TC
B18 R16G16Y16
–L16
––
C16
① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: K43J35+H(2 KA1)=K43J35FRH2
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 82.EXAMPLE: K43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage=K43J37
➂ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.EXAMPLE: K43J35➂ with a green knob = K43J35G
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED usered knob) or use a clear knob.
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: KS88K11 + H13(KA1-SIDE 2) = KS88K11H13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color tableEXAMPLE: KS88➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS88FG
➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table below.EXAMPLE: KS88K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS88K12
➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (keyonly part no. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes areavailable at no extra cost: E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all op-erable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions areavailable.
EXAMPLE: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number isKS88K11E29.All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased by spec-ifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.
➄ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table below.EXAMPLE: K88J➄ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = K88J37
➅ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen, (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use clear knob.
➆ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 4 Position Selector SwitchOperatorsFor use in hazardous locations – See page 98.UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED1 — Contact
Closed0 — Contact Open
Contact Block Position Quantity and Type Mount on Side
1 0 0 0KA1#2
KA3#2
KA2#2 0 0 1 0
KA1#1
KA3#1 0 0 0 1
KA2#1 0 1 0 0
Non-Illuminated Operators Cam Type
Manual Return ➀Operator Only ➀ Without Knob With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁ Key Operated with E10 Key (Codes 11,12,13,14,15) ➂➃
HHHH
KS88KS88BKS88 ➁
KS88K ➂
Spring Return From Left - Spring Return From Right-Maintained in the Two Mid PositionsOperator Only ➀Without Knob With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
HHH
KS89KS89BKS89➁
Illuminated Operators Cam Type
Manual Return ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and With Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆
HHHHHH
K88J1K88J1RK88J➄K88J➄
K88J➄➁K88J➄➁
Spring Return From Left - Spring Return From Right-Maintained in the Two Mid Positions
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and With Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆
HHHHHH
K89J1K89J1RK89J➄K89J➄
K89J➄➁K89J➄➁
Key No.Total KeyChangesAvailable
Master Key (E99)
Part No.
E36 thru E60 25 2941151990
Top View
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
KA1KA3
KA2
KA1KA3
KA2
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Pilot Lights – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Type 4 & 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plates Not Included
Description Voltage StyleWith Red
Fresnel Color Cap
With Green Fresnel Color
Cap
With OtherColor Cap
Without Color Cap
Standard Pilot Light(Plastic fresnel
Color Cap Shown)
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
24-28 Vac-dcFor Other Voltages See
Table ➀
TransformerTransformerFull Voltage
Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃
KP1R31KP7R31
KP35R31KP➀R31KP➀R31
KP1G31KP7G31
KP35G31KP➀G31KP➀G31
KP1 ➁KP7 ➁
KP35 ➁KP ➀➁KP ➀➁
KP1KP7
KP35KP ➀KP ➀
Push To Test Pilot Light
(Glass Color Cap Shown)
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
24-28 Vac-dcFor Other Voltages
See Table ➀
TransformerTransformerFull Voltage
Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃
KT1R31KT7R31
KT35R31KT➀R31KT➀R31
KT1G31KT7G31
KT35G31KT➀G31KT➀G31
KT1 ➁KT7 ➁
KT35 ➁KT ➀➁KT ➀➁
KT1KT7
KT35KT ➀KT ➀
Remote Test Pilot Light
(Glass Color Cap Shown)
120 Vac Only24-28 Vac Only
For Other VoltagesSee Table ➀➄
Resistor ➄Full Voltage ➄
Full Voltage or Resistor ➄
KTR38R31KTR35R31KTR➀R31
KTR38G31KTR35G31KTR➀G31
KTR38 ➁KTR35 ➁KTR ➀➁
KTR38KTR35KTR ➀
Pilot Light For Intrinsically
Safe Circuits(NEMA Type 4X)
Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal energy capa-ble of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous atmospheres, for which the equipment has been tested.These pilot lights are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved bar-rier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2). These pilot lights are Factory Mutual (FM approved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further de-tails.These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – ex-cept for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates as shown on pages 100 and 101.
KP44R KP44G
KP44Y(YellowColorCap)
—
OperatingVoltage Range Nominal Current
V max. = 32 VI max. = 165 mA20-30 V
AC/DC 25 mA
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Voltage Assembly Codes See Page 82
R
M
M O.L.
L2
321
L1
STOPSTART
L2
C
Test
L1
M
STOP
LSI
M3
(TEST) C
(TEST) C L2
L2
L1(SIG)
CR
M2
M1
L2(TEST) C
START
TEST BUTTONL1 L2
L1(SIG)
L1(SIG)
Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Remote Test Pilot Light
➀ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 82.EXAMPLE: KT①R31 with a 60VAC red LED voltage=KT37LRR31
➁ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table. EXAMPLE: KP1➁ with a bluefresnel cap = KP1L31
➂ The color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED use agreen color cap) or use clear cap.
➃ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.➄ On remote test pilot lights use only full voltage or resistor voltage assembly codes. Do not
choose LED, neon or transformer codes. For AC use only.
Push-To-Test Ground Detector Pilot Light(Contact Block Included — But NOT Legend Plate or Color Cap)
Used in pairs to indicate a grounded condition in a control circuit fed from a grounded center-tapped transformer. The Type KT50 is commonly used in press control circuits, and fulfills therequirements of the ground detector called for in ANSI B11.1 (1971), Par. E3.6.5. Consult local Square D Sales Office for proper application.
Voltage and Frequency Type
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz KT50
Color
➁ Plastic Fresnel ➁ Plastic Domed ➁ Glass
AmberBlueClearGreenRed
WhiteYellow
A31L31C31G31R31W31Y31
A9L9C9G9R9W9Y9
A6L6C6G6R6W6Y6
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mmHeavy Duty Joysticks
Joy Stick Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Contact Blocks And Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
DescriptionOperator
WithContacts
OperatorWithout
Contacts ➀
3 Position-Center
Off
Momentary Contact —Spring Return to Center
Without Latch K71H7 K71
With Latch K70H7 K70
Maintained ContactWithout Latch K73H7 K73
With Latch K72H7 K72
3 Position-Center
Off
Momentary Contact —Spring Return to Center
Without Latch K31H8 K31
With Latch K30H8 K30
Maintained ContactWithout Latch K33H8 K33
With Latch K32H8 K32
5 Position-Center
Off
Momentary Contact —Spring Return to Center
Without Latch K35H2 K35
With Latch K34H2 K34
Maintained ContactWithout Latch K37H2 K37
With Latch K36H2 K36
The joystick operator is ideal for applications where only one circuit is to be energized at one time. The three position joy stick closes one circuit each in Up-Down or Right-Left position with all circuits open in center position. The five position operator closes one circuit each in Up, Down, Left and Right positions with all circuits open in center position.Momentary contact operators are spring return to the center position. Maintained operators remain in each position and must be reset manually. Operators with latch cannot be operated until the latch button in center of handle is pressed.
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.Use Legend Plate 9001KN900
Selector Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included
Inserts are field convertible. For colors not listed, order operator without insertplus separate color insert from page 105. Up to two Type KA contact blockscan be mounted in tandem (total of four blocks). Selector push buttons cannotbe illuminated.
➀ Order color inserts from page 105.➁ Cams are not interchangeable.
Key operated push buttons are used wherever unauthorizeduse of a push button is to be discouraged. Examples are lock-ing a “Start” push button in the extended position or locking a“Stop” push button in the depressed position. The operator canalso be locked in the flush position –holding all contacts open.Up to two Type KA contact blocks can be mounted in tan-dem (total of four blocks).
All key operated push buttons are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 keychange.
See page 82 for other key changes (Note 4).
Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included
DescriptionPositions In Which
Push Button Can Be Locked TypeExtended Flush Depressed
Push button operable only with key in lock. Key is removable in locked position only.
X––X
–X–X
––XX
KR131KR132KR133KR137
Push button operable with or without key in lock. Push button can be locked with key only. Key removable in both locked or un-locked position.
X––X
–X–X
––XX
KR141KR142KR143KR147
Unit is set by rotating key, with button in ex-tended position. Key is removable only in this set position. When pushed, the button will then lock in position indicated at right.
––
X–
–X
KR152KR153
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mmHeavy Duty Operators
➀ The dial plate only is Class 9001 Type KN905. ➁ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below. Example: Type K2105➂ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below. Example: Type K2385➃ For use with 9050 Type T. Pontentiometer shaft diameter 1/4” (6 mm), 7/8” (22 mm) length.Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Mark.
Potentiometer (with Dial Plate ➀ – NEMA Types 4, 13)Watts Description Type
2
Operator only – Single PotOperator with Single Pot
Operator only – Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot
K20K21 ➁
K22K23 ➂
➁ ➂ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.Example: Type K2105
Operator is held in a depressed position by a glass disc. When the glass discis broken with the hammer, button returns to a normal extended position.Package of 5 discs included with operator. For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA1 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA4.For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of a 9001KA4 or 9001KA6.
Type
K15
9001 K15 Replacement PartsDescription Part Number
Yellow bumperHammer and chain
Lower ring nutTop ring nut
Package of 5 replacement discsClip to hold hammer
310521110131052067506512232801
9001K409001K57
2540902240
Time Delay Push Button – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
Time Delay After Release of Button
Note:When mounted in top or bottomhole of Type K enclosures, de-vice requires one additionalspace below or above operator.When mounted other than in topor bottom hole, device may re-quire two additional spaces, oneabove and one below operator.Closing plates must be installedon unused holes.
DescriptionType (All Colors)
FullGuard
ExtendedGuard
NoGuard
Timed Cont.1 N.O. and 1
N.C.
KRD1UH1 KRD2UH1 KRD3UH1
Timed Cont.2 N.O. and 2
N.C.
KRD1UH2 KRD2UH2 KRD3UH2
Timing period is adjustable from 0.1 second to 60 secondsand begins after button has been released. Devices includea package of seven color inserts for color coding the pushbutton. Contacts are quick make – quick break.
Rocker Arm Operating Lever
Allows two standard push buttons to be operated independent-ly of each other. Order push buttons and legend plates frompages 72 and 100 — specify which marking is to be inverted.
Type
K50
Alternate Action – (Push-On Push-Off) Module
This module can be added to standard 9001 Type K, KX, SK or T mo-mentary push button operators. Contact blocks mounted behind thismodule (maximum of 2) will be held in the depressed position whenthe operator is operated once and released to their normal positionwhen the operator is operated again. For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA1 or the N.C. contact of a9001KA4. For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of a 9001KA4 or9001KA6.
Type
K85
Wobble Stick
For easy operation of any standardpush button.
Type
K8
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Non-Illuminated Momentary Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Contact Blocks And Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
Description ColorOperator With 1 N.O.
and1 N.C. Contact (KA1)
Operator With (KA2)
Operator With 1 N.C. Contact(KA3)
Operator Only With No Contacts ➄
Full Guard
Black SKR1BH13 SKR1BH5 SKR1BH6 SKR1B
Red SKR1RH13 SKR1RH5 SKR1RH6 SKR1R
Green SKR1GH13 SKR1GH5 SKR1GH6 SKR1G
Universal ➀ SKR1UH13 SKR1UH5 SKR1UH6 SKR1U
Other ➁ SKR1➁H13 SKR1➁H5 SKR1➁H6 SKR1➁
No Guard
Black SKR3BH13 SKR3BH5 SKR3BH6 SKR3B
Red SKR3RH13 SKR3RH5 SKR3RH6 SKR3R
Green SKR3GH13 SKR3GH5 SKR3GH6 SKR3G
Universal ➀ SKR3UH13 SKR3UH5 SKR3UH6 SKR3U
Other ➁ SKR3➁H13 SKR3➁H5 SKR3➁H6 SKR3➁
Extended Guard
Black SKR2BH13 SKR2BH5 SKR2BH6 SKR2B
Red SKR2RH13 SKR2RH5 SKR2RH6 SKR2R
Green SKR2GH13 SKR2GH5 SKR2GH6 SKR2G
Universal ➀ SKR2UH13 SKR2UH5 SKR2UH6 SKR2U
Other ➁ SKR2➁ SKR2➁H5 SKR2➁H6 SKR2➁
13/8 Mushroom Button
Snap In Mushroom Button
Black SKR4BH13 SKR4BH5 SKR4BH6 SKR4B
Red SKR4RH13 SKR4RH5 SKR4RH6 SKR4R
Red ➂ SKR4R05H13 SKR4R05H5 SKR4R05H6 SKR4R05
Green SKR4GH13 SKR4GH5 SKR4GH6 SKR4G
Other ➃ SKR4➃H13 SKR4➃H5 SKR4➃H6 SKR4➃
Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security
Black SKR24BH13 SKR24BH5 SKR24BH6 SKR24B
Red SKR24RH13 SKR24RH5 SKR24RH6 SKR24R
Green SKR24GH13 SKR24GH5 SKR24GH6 SKR24G
Other ➃ SKR24➃H13 SKR24➃H5 SKR24➃H6 SKR24➃
21/4 Mushroom Button
Snap-In Mushroom Button
Black SKR5BH13 SKR5BH5 SKR5BH6 SKR5B
Red SKR5RH13 SKR5RH5 SKR5RH6 SKR5R
Red ➂ SKR5R05H13 SKR5R05H5 SKR5R05H6 SKR5R05
Green SKR5GH13 SKR5GH5 SKR5GH6 SKR5G
Other ➃ SKR5➃H13 SKR5➃H5 SKR5➃H6 SKR5➃
Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security
Black SKR25BH13 SKR25BH5 SKR25BH6 SKR25B
Red SKR25RH13 SKR25RH5 SKR25RH6 SKR25R
Green SKR25GH13 SKR25GH5 SKR25GH6 SKR25G
Other ➃ SKR25➃H13 SKR25➃H5 SKR25➃H6 SKR25➃
➀ The universal push button operators include one each of the following color inserts: black,red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
➁ See table below.➂ Knob has the words “Emergency Stop” in raised letters highlighted in white for readability.
Available in red snap-in mushroom buttons only.➃ See table below.➄ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber. EXAMPLE: SKR24B + H2(2-KA1) = SKR24BH2
Multifunction Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate And Contact Blocks Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
Description Color Contacts ➇ Without Contacts ➆
Both Buttons MaintainedInterlocked Assembly
Universal ➀Other ➁
SKR11UH1SKR11➁H1
SKR11USKR11➁
One Button MomentaryOne Button MaintainedInterlocked Assembly
Universal ➀Other ➁
SKR12UH1H1SKR12➁H1H1
SKR12USKR12➁
Non-Illuminated15/8" Diameter Knob
Includes Type KN179WPLegend Plate Marked
Pull To Start Push To Stop
Description Color With 2 N.C. Contacts(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With 1 N.O. 1 N.C. Contact (1 KA1)
WithoutContacts ➆
3 POSITIONMomentary Pull-
Maintained Neutral-Momentary Push
Red ➈Green
Other ➂
SKR8RH25SKR8GH25SKR8➂H25
–––
SKR8RSKR8GSKR8➂
2 POSITIONMaintained Pull-Maintained Push
Red ➈Green
Other ➂
–––
SKR9RH13SKR9GH13SKR9➂H13
SKR9RSKR9GSKR9➂
Illuminated15/8" Diameter Knob
Includes Type KN179WP Legend Plate Marked
Pull to Start Push To Stop
Description VoltageWith Red Knob ➈
With 2 N.C. Contacts (1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With Other Color Knob With 2 N.C. Contacts
(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With Other Color Knob Without Contacts ➆
3 POSITIONMomentary Pull-
Maintained Neutral-Momentary Push
110-120 V, 50-60 HzOther – Transformer, LED,
Flashing ➄Other – Full Voltage, Resistor,
Neon ➅
SKR8P1RH25SKR8P➃RH25
SKR8P➃RH25
SKR8P1➂H25SKR8P➃➂H25
SKR8P➃➂H25
SKR8P1➂SKR8P➃➂
SKR8P➃➂
Description Voltage With Red ➈ Knob With 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact (KA1)
With Other Color Knob With 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact (KA1)
With Other Color Knob Without Contacts
2 POSITIONMaintained Pull-Maintained Push
Illuminated
110-120 V, 50-60 HzOther – Transformer, L.E.D.,
Flashing ➄Other – Full Voltage, Resistor,
Neon ➅
SKR9P1RH13SKR9P➃RH13
SKR9P➃RH13
SKR9P1➂H13SKR9P➃➂H13
SKR9P➃➂H13
SKR9P1➂SKR9P➃➂
SKR9P➃➂
➀ Universal for SKR11,12 includes 2 each of black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, white.➁ Choose one color for each button from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: An SKR11 with top button gray and bottom button orange = SKR11ES➂ Choose one color from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: SKR9 with a yellow knob=SKR9Y➃ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 89.
EXAMPLE: SKR8P➃ with a 277 V 50-60 Hz voltage=SKR8P8➄ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED uses
green knob) or use a clear knob.➅ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.➆ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.
➇ SKR11UH1 has 1 KA1(1N.O., 1N.C.) and SKR12UH1H1 has 2 KA1 (2N.O., 2N.C.).➈ To obtain a red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob – substitute “R05” in
place of “R”. Not available in 1 3/8” or 2 1/4”.
These colors are not available on illuminated push-pull operators.
Illuminated Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
47
F7
KM4KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
2512
KM25KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 8 KM8
380 Vac-dc Neon 13 KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
514
KM5KM14
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon Transformer
156
KM15KM6
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber. EXAMPLE: SK2L36R20 +H2 (2 KA1) =SK2L36R20H2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table atright. EXAMPLE: SK2L➁ with a 240 Vac-dc voltage=SK2L25.
➂ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.➃ The color of the color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED
uses red color cap) or use a clear cap.➄ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table below. EXAMPLE: SK2L25➄ with
a blue 13/8" mushroom button=SK2L25L20.➅ The only difference between a no guard (SK2L) operator and mushroom button operators is
Non-Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side Left Right Left Right
Top View
KA1KA3
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1
KA2 KA2#2 0 1 1 0
KA1
KA3
KA1#1
KA3#1 1 0 0 1
KA2KA2#1 0 1 1 0
CAM E D
Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type
Manual Return
Operator Only ➀Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
SKS11SKS11BSKS11 ➁
SKS12SKS12BSKS12 ➁
With Contact Block(s)
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors,Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)With 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H2)
SKS11BH13SKS11BH1SKS11BH2
–––
Spring Return from Left Operator Only ➀Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
SKS25SKS25BSKS25 ➁
–––
Spring Return From Right Operator Only ➀Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
–––
SKS34SKS34BSKS34 ➁
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.Example: SKS11FB+H13(KA1-Side 2) = SKS11FBH13
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.Example: SKS11➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS11FG
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber. Example: SK12J35FR+H2(2 KA1) = SK12J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code tablebelow. Example: SK25J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc Voltage = SK25J37
➂ Add the color code as chosen from the knob color table at right. Example: SK25J35➂ witha green knob = SK25J35G
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use a clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side Left Right Left Right
Top View
KA1KA3
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1
KA2 KA2#2 0 1 1 0
KA1KA3
KA1#1
KA3#1 1 0 0 1
KA2 KA2#1 0 1 1 0
CAM E D
Illuminated Operators Type Type
Manual Return ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK11J1SK11J1RSK11J➁SK11J➁
SK11J➁➂SK11J➁➂
SK12J1SK12J1RSK12J➁SK12J➂
SK12J➁➁SK12J➁➂
Spring Return from Left ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK25J1SK25J1RSK25J➁SK25J➁
SK25J➁➂SK25J➁➂
––––––
Spring Return From Right ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
––––––
SK34J1SK34J1RSK34J➁SK34J➁
SK34J➁➂SK34J➁➂
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
StandardKnob
GlovedHand Knob
CoinOperated
➂KnobCode
Type➂
KnobCode
Type➂
KnobCode
Type
RedGreenYellowBlueWhiteAmberClear
RGYLWAC
R8G8Y8L8W8A8C8
FRFGFYFLFWFAFC
R24G24Y24L24W24A24C24
TRTGTYTL––
TC
R16G16Y16L16
––
C16
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type SK11J1 Form Y-178.
Non-Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return
Operator Only➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁
SKS42SKS42BSKS42➁
SKS43SKS43BSKS43➁
SKS44SKS44BSKS44➁
SKS45SKS45BSKS45➁
SKS46SKS46BSKS46➁
SKS47SKS47BSKS47➁
SKS49SKS49BSKS49➁
SKS401SKS401BSKS401➁
SKS402SKS402BSKS402➁
With Con-tact Block(s)
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors, Replace B in Type No. with Color Code)With 1 KA1 on side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 (H2)
SKS42BH13SKS42BH1SKS42BH2
SKS43BH13SKS43BH1SKS43BH2
SKS44BH13SKS44BH1SKS44BH2
SKS45BH13SKS45BH1SKS45BH2
SKS46BH13SKS46BH1SKS46BH2
SKS47BH13SKS47BH1SKS47BH2
SKS49BH13SKS49BH1SKS49BH2
SKS401BH13SKS401BH1SKS401BH2
SKS402BH13SKS402BH1SKS402BH2
Spring Return from
Left to Center
Operator Only➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁
SKS62SKS62BSKS62➁
SKS63SKS63BSKS63➁
SKS64SKS64BSKS64➁
SKS65SKS65BSKS65➁
SKS66SKS66BSKS66➁
SKS67SKS67BSKS67➁
SKS69SKS69BSKS69➁
SKS601SKS601BSKS601➁
SKS602SKS602BSKS602➁
Spring Return From
Right to Center
Operator Only➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁
SKS72SKS72BSKS72➁
SKS73SKS73BSKS73➁
SKS74SKS74BSKS74➁
SKS75SKS75BSKS75➁
SKS76SKS76BSKS76➁
SKS77SKS77BSKS77➁
SKS79SKS79BSKS79➁
SKS701SKS701BSKS701➁
SKS702SKS702BSKS702➁
Spring Return Both
Sides to Center
Operator Only➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.EXAMPLE: SKS43FB+H13(KA1-POS 2) = SKS43FBH13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.EXAMPLE: SKS43➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS43FG.
Selector Switch Knobs
ColorStandard
Knob GlovedHand Knob
CoinOperated
➁KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type
BlackRed
GreenYellowOrange
BlueWhiteAmberClear
BRGYSLWAC
B11R8G8Y8
S11L8W8A8C8
FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC
B25R24G24Y24S25L24W24A24C24
TBTRTGTY–
TL––
TC
B18R16G16Y16
–L16
––
C16
OROR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
47
F7
KM4KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
2512
KM25KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 8 KM8
380 Vac-dc Neon 13 KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
514
KM5KM14
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon Transformer
156
KM15KM6
Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
SK42J1SK42J1RSK42J➁SK42J➁
SK42J➁➂SK42J➁➂
SK43J1SK43J1RSK43J➁SK43J➁
SK43J➁➂SK43J➁➂
SK44J1SK44J1RSK44J➁SK44J➁
SK44J➁➂SK44J➁➂
SK45J1SK45J1RSK45J➁SK45J➁
SK45J➁➂SK45J➁➂
SK46J1SK46J1RSK46J➁SK46J➁
SK46J➁➂SK46J➁➂
SK47J1SK47J1RSK47J➁SK47J➁
SK47J➁➂SK47J➁➂
SK49J1SK49J1RSK49J➁SK49J➁
SK49J➁➂SK49J➁➂
SK401J1SK401J1RSK401J➁SK401J➁
SK401J➁➂SK401J➁➂
SK402J1SK402J1RSK402J➁SK402J➁
SK402J➁➂SK402J➁➂
Spring Return Left
To Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
SK62J1SK62J1RSK62J➁SK62J➁
SK62J➁➂SK62J➁➂
SK63J1SK63J1RSK63J➁SK63J➁
SK63J➁➂SK63J➁➂
SK64J1SK64J1RSK64J➁SK64J➁
SK64J➁➂SK64J➁➂
SK65J1SK65J1RSK65J➁SK65J➁
SK65J➁➂SK65J➁➂
SK66J1SK66J1RSK66J➁SK66J➁
SK66J➁➂SK66J➁➂
SK67J1SK67J1RSK67J➁SK67J➁
SK67J➁➂SK67J➁➂
SK69J1SK69J1RSK69J➁SK69J➁
SK69J➁➂SK69J➁➂
SK601J1SK601J1RSK601J➁SK601J➁
SK601J➁➂SK601J➁➂
SK602J1SK602J1RSK602J➁SK602J➁
SK602J➁➂SK602J➁➂
Spring Return
Right To Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
SK72J1SK72J1RSK72J➁SK72J➁
SK72J➁➂SK72J➁➂
SK73J1SK73J1RSK73J➁SK73J➁
SK73J➁➂SK73J➁➂
SK74J1SK74J1RSK74J➁SK74J➁
SK74J➁➂SK74J➁➂
SK75J1SK75J1RSK75J➁SK75J➁
SK75J➁➂SK75J➁➂
SK76J1SK76J1RSK76J➁SK76J➁
SK76J➁➂SK76J➁➂
SK77J1SK77J1RSK77J➁SK77J➁
SK77J➁➂SK77J➁➂
SK79J1SK79J1RSK79J➁SK79J➁
SK79J➁➂SK79J➁➂
SK701J1SK701J1RSK701J➁SK701J➁
SK701J➁➂SK701J➁➂
SK702J1SK702J1RSK702J➁SK702J➁
SK702J➁➂SK702J➁➂
Spring Return
Both Sides To Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
SK52J1SK52J1RSK52J➁SK52J➁
SK52J➁➂SK52J➁➂
SK53J1SK53J1RSK53J➁SK53J➁
SK53J➁➂SK53J➁➂
SK54J1SK54J1RSK54J➁SK54J➁
SK54J➁➂SK54J➁➂
SK55J1SK55J1RSK55J➁SK55J➁
SK55J➁➂SK55J➁➂
SK56J1SK56J1RSK56J➁SK56J➁
SK56J➁➂SK56J➁➂
SK57J1SK57J1RSK57J➁SK57J➁
SK57J➁➂SK57J➁➂
SK59J1SK59J1RSK59J➁SK59J➁
SK59J➁➂SK59J➁➂
SK501J1SK501J1RSK501J➁SK501J➁
SK501J➁➂SK501J➁➂
SK502J1SK502J1RSK502J➁SK502J➁
SK502J➁➂SK502J➁➂
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: SK43J35FR+H2(2KA1) = SK43J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table at right.EXAMPLE: SK43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = SK43J37.
➂ Add the color as chosen from knob color table on page 91.EXAMPLE: SK43J35➂ with a green gloved hand knob = SK43J35FG.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED usered knob) or use a clear kob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage DescriptionVoltage
AssemblyCode
SeparateLight ModuleType Number
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3131LR31LG31LY
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3232LR32LG32LY
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
18 Vac-dc Resistor 33 KM33
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3535LR35LG35LY
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
32 Vac-dc Resistor 23 KM23
48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3636LR36LG36LY
KM36KM36LRKM36LGKM36LY
60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3737LR37LG37LY
KM37KM37LRKM37LGKM37LY
For additional product information and accessoriesSee Page 92
OR
OR
OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return
➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
SK42J1SK42J1RSK42J
➁
SK42J
➁
SK42J
➁➂
SK42J
➁➂
SK43J1SK43J1RSK43J
➁
SK43J
➁
SK43J
➁➂
SK43J
➁➂
SK44J1SK44J1RSK44J
➁
SK44J
➁
SK44J
➁➂
SK44J
➁➂
SK45J1SK45J1RSK45J
➁
SK45J
➁
SK45J
➁➂
SK45J
➁➂
SK46J1SK46J1RSK46J
➁
SK46J
➁
SK46J
➁➂
SK46J
➁➂
SK47J1SK47J1RSK47J
➁
SK47J
➁
SK47J
➁➂
SK47J
➁➂
SK49J1SK49J1RSK49J
➁
SK49J
➁
SK49J
➁➂
SK49J
➁➂
SK401J1SK401J1RSK401J
➁
SK401J
➁
SK401J
➁➂
SK401J
➁➂
SK402J1SK402J1RSK402J
➁
SK402J
➁
SK402J
➁➂
SK402J
➁➂
Spring Return Left
To Center
➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
SK62J1SK62J1RSK62J
➁
SK62J
➁
SK62J
➁➂
SK62J
➁➂
SK63J1SK63J1RSK63J
➁
SK63J
➁
SK63J
➁➂
SK63J
➁➂
SK64J1SK64J1RSK64J
➁
SK64J
➁
SK64J
➁➂
SK64J
➁➂
SK65J1SK65J1RSK65J
➁
SK65J
➁
SK65J
➁➂
SK65J
➁➂
SK66J1SK66J1RSK66J
➁
SK66J
➁
SK66J
➁➂
SK66J
➁➂
SK67J1SK67J1RSK67J
➁
SK67J
➁
SK67J
➁➂
SK67J
➁➂
SK69J1SK69J1RSK69J
➁
SK69J
➁
SK69J
➁➂
SK69J
➁➂
SK601J1SK601J1RSK601J
➁
SK601J
➁
SK601J
➁➂
SK601J
➁➂
SK602J1SK602J1RSK602J
➁
SK602J
➁
SK602J
➁➂
SK602J
➁➂
Spring Return
Right To Center
➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
SK72J1SK72J1RSK72J
➁
SK72J
➁
SK72J
➁➂
SK72J
➁➂
SK73J1SK73J1RSK73J
➁
SK73J
➁
SK73J
➁➂
SK73J
➁➂
SK74J1SK74J1RSK74J
➁
SK74J
➁
SK74J
➁➂
SK74J
➁➂
SK75J1SK75J1RSK75J
➁
SK75J
➁
SK75J
➁➂
SK75J
➁➂
SK76J1SK76J1RSK76J
➁
SK76J
➁
SK76J
➁➂
SK76J
➁➂
SK77J1SK77J1RSK77J
➁
SK77J
➁
SK77J
➁➂
SK77J
➁➂
SK79J1SK79J1RSK79J
➁
SK79J
➁
SK79J
➁➂
SK79J
➁➂
SK701J1SK701J1RSK701J
➁
SK701J
➁
SK701J
➁➂
SK701J
➁➂
SK702J1SK702J1RSK702J
➁
SK702J
➁
SK702J
➁➂
SK702J
➁➂
Spring Return
Both Sides To Center
➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
SK52J1SK52J1RSK52J
➁
SK52J
➁
SK52J
➁➂
SK52J
➁➂
SK53J1SK53J1RSK53J
➁
SK53J
➁
SK53J
➁➂
SK53J
➁➂
SK54J1SK54J1RSK54J
➁
SK54J
➁
SK54J
➁➂
SK54J
➁➂
SK55J1SK55J1RSK55J
➁
SK55J
➁
SK55J
➁➂
SK55J
➁➂
SK56J1SK56J1RSK56J
➁
SK56J
➁
SK56J
➁➂SK56J➁➂
SK57J1SK57J1RSK57J➁SK57J➁
SK57J➁➂SK57J➁➂
SK59J1SK59J1RSK59J➁SK59J➁
SK59J➁➂SK59J➁➂
SK501J1SK501J1RSK501J➁SK501J➁
SK501J➁➂SK501J➁➂
SK502J1SK502J1RSK502J➁SK502J➁
SK502J➁➂SK502J➁➂
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: SK43J35FR+H2(2KA1) = SK43J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table at right.EXAMPLE: SK43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = SK43J37.
➂ Add the color as chosen from knob color table on page 91.EXAMPLE: SK43J35➂ with a green gloved hand knob = SK43J35FG.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED usered knob) or use a clear kob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage DescriptionVoltage
AssemblyCode
SeparateLight ModuleType Number
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3131LR31LG31LY
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3232LR32LG32LY
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
18 Vac-dc Resistor 33 KM33
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3535LR35LG35LY
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
32 Vac-dc Resistor 23 KM23
48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3636LR36LG36LY
KM36KM36LRKM36LGKM36LY
60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3737LR37LG37LY
KM37KM37LRKM37LGKM37LY
For additional product information and accessoriesSee Page 92
OR
OR
OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches and Potentiometers
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type num-ber.EXAMPLE: SKS88FB + H13(KA1-SIDE 2) = SKS88FBH13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.EXAMPLE: SKS88➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS88FG.
➂ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Voltage Assembly Code Table on page 93.EXAMPLE: SK88J➂ with a 60 Vac-Vdc voltage = SK88J37.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use a clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages, use clear knobs only.
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 4 Position Selector Switch Oper-ators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted. For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED
1 — Contact Closed
0 — Contact Open
Contact Block Position Quantity and Type Mount on Side
1 0 0 0
Top View
KA1
KA3
KA1#2
KA3#2
KA2KA2#2 0 0 1 0
KA1
KA3
KA1#1
KA3#1 0 0 0 1
KA2KA2#1 0 1 0 0
Non-Illuminated Operators Cam Type
Manual Return Operator Only ➀ Without Knob With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
HHH
SKS88SKS88BSKS88➁
Spring Return From Left Spring Return From Right Maintained in the Two Mid Positions Operator Only ➀ Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
HHH
SKS89SKS89BSKS89➁
Illuminated Operators
Manual Return ➀ Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Without Knob and With Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄ With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
HHHHHH
SK88J1SK88J1RSK88J➂SK88J➂
SK88J➂➁SK88J➂➁
Spring Return From Left Spring Return From Right Maintained in the Two Mid Positions Operator Only ➀ Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄ With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
HHHHHH
SK89J1SK89J1RSK89J➂SK89J➂
SK89J➂➁SK89J➂➁
i
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
Voltage Assembly Codes See Page 93
➅ The dial plate only is Class 9001 Type SKN905.➈ For use with 9050 Type T.♦ Potentiometer shaft diameter = 1/4" (6 mm), length = 7/8" (22 mm).Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Marked.
Black and orange are opaque and for use on non-illuminated operators only.
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage SKT35R31 SKT35G31 SKT35➁ SKT35
For other voltagessee Table ➀
Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂ SKT➀R31 SKT➀G31 SKT➀➁ SKT➀
Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃ SKT➀R31 SKT➀G31 SKT➀➁ SKT➀
Remote TestPilot Light
(Plastic fresnel color cap shown)
120 Vac Only Resistor ➄ SKTR38R31 SKTR38G31 SKTR38➁ SKTR38
24-28 Vac Only Full Voltage ➄ SKTR35R31 SKTR35G31 SKTR35➁ SKTR35
For other voltagessee Tables ➀➁➄ Full Voltage or Resistor➄ SKTR➀R31 SKTR➀➄G31 SKTR➀➁➄ SKTR➀
Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits(NEMA 4X)
Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal en-ergy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous at-mosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.These pilot lights are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable ap-proved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2). These pi-lot lights are Factory Mutual (FM approved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.These pilot lights are fully encapsulated — there are no replaceable parts — except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates as shown on pages 100 and 101
Standard Light Modules for Types K, SK,. and KX Control Units ➃
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.• Neon type light modules — use CLEAR color caps only.• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
Shallow Depth Light Modules For Types K and SK Control UnitsFor use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Reduces the depth of illuminated push buttons with contact blocks by over 33%.• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
➀ 9001 K, SK, KX.➁ Do not use on any remote test version pilot light.➂ LED lamps shown here will also function in Class 9001 Type J pilot lights.➃ For Series A through F light modules – see page 106.➄ All light modules with a LED above 12 V use a 14 V Bipolar LED.➅ 9001K, SK, T
Voltage Description
For UseWith Single Lamp Ill.
Operators as Indicated➀
Light Module
Type No. ➄
Voltage Assembly
CodeRating
Replacement Lamps ➂ ➃
LampNumber(ANSI)
Lamp PartNumber ➄
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
AllAll Except ➁All Except ➁All Except ➁
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
3131LR31LG31LY
0.9 VA0.65 VA0.65 VA0.65 VA
755 2550101020650880520165088052036508805202
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
AllAll Except ➁ All Except ➁All Except ➁
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
3232LR32LG32LY
1.2 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA
756 2550101037650880520165088052036508805202
18 Vac-dc Resistor All KM33 33 1.4 VA 756 2550101037
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
AllAll Except ➁ All Except ➁ All Except ➁
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
3535LR35LG35LY
1.2 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA
757 2550101002650880520465088052066508805205
32 Vac-dc Resistor All KM23 23 2.5 VA 757 2550101002
For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K orSKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For se-quencing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.
Standard Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
(Clear Cover)
KA1
(Green Cover)
KA2
(Red Cover)
KA3
(Clear Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA4
(Red Cover)
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA5
(Green Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA6
Additional Circuit Arrangements AvailableSequencing N.O. Contact of
KA4 closes beforeN.O. Contact on
KA1 KA4 KA1
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA1
Overlapping N.O. Contact of
KA4 closesbefore N.C.
Contact of KA5Opens
KA4 KA5
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA5
Minimum order quantity is 25.
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks, But Provide:• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue connectors• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep vs. 0.97" deep
on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89. • Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.
Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts – Types KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
Volts
AC
Volts
DC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600)35% Power Factor Resistive 75%
Power FactorMake, Break
and ContinuousAmperes
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type P600)
Make Break ContinuousCarryingAmperes
Make and Break Continuous
CarryingAmperes
Amperes VA Amperes VA KA1 KA2KA3 KA4 KA5
KA6
120240480600
60301512
7200720072007200
6.03.01.51.2
720720720720
10101010
10101010
125250600
1.10.550.2
1.10.550.2
1.1––
1.10.550.2
101010
The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are Fingersafe contact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminal screws. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the wiping action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will accept up to 2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA3, KA31, and KA33 NC contacts are direct opening.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmReed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information
In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explosion-proofequipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control stations. It can savemoney to know what type of hazardous location exists. If you're not surewhat type of hazardous location exists, the “Summary of Classification”Chart may help. If not, contact your local electrical inspector. When youknow what class, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in the lowerlefthand corner of this page for what Square D has to offer.
① An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or anintrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardousarea to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system,any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can beused. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light,may be used.
➁ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Divi-sion 2 hazardous locations.1. Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.2. All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2
areas. 3. Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules
other than the transformer type. 4. The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.
➂ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.
For ➁ and ➂: UL Listed: File E10054(N), CCN NOIV.For : Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.
Summary Of Classification Chart
Class Division Group
I. Gas 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
B. Location adjacent to Division 1 location.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases Containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
II. Dust 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
E. Conductive and Combustible Dust (Resistivity <105 ohms/cm)
F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity >102 ohm/cm but ≤ 108ohm/cm)
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
III. Fibers1. Production Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
2. Handling and Storage Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
ForUse
Class Division Group(s)
I 1 A 1. Intrinsically Safe System ①
I 1 B, C, D 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System ①
I 2 A1.
2.
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
I 2 B, C, D
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
II 1 E, F, G 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System ①
II 2 E, F
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
II 2 G
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①
III 1, 2 –
1.2.
3.
9001 BR Station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①
All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire.
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per opera-tor is as indicated on page 103 for standard contact blocks, except:• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M”
mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tan-dem.
• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (ei-ther side), maximum 2 in tandem.
• On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blockson one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters throughNEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.➃ Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor.➄ Inductive and Resistive Ratings.
Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact BlocksSuitable for use on low energy level circuits
Description Symbol Type
KA41
KA42
KA43
KA44
KA45
Max. Volts AC/DCMaximum Load
Res. Ind. Cont.32/30
120/1000.25 A 8 VA
0.10 A3 VA
0.5 A0.5 A
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
KA51
KA52
KA53
KA54
KA55
Volts
AC NEMA Type C300 ➃Make Break Continuous
Carrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
120240
10.005.00
12001200
1.0000.500
120120
3.03.0
Volts
DC NEMA Type Q150 ➄Make Break Continuous
Carrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
115 0.50 58 0.50 58 3.0
Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits — NEMA Type 4XIntrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal en-
ergy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous at-mosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.
Listed below are pilot lights that are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2. These pilot lights are Factory Mutual FM# J.I. OH4A2,AX,3610 (FM ap-proved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.
These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates as shown on pages 100 and 101.
OperatingVoltageRange
NominalCurrent
LensColor Type
V max. = 32 V 20-30 VAC/DC 25 mA
RedGreenYellow
KP44RKP44GKP44YI max. = 165 mA
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK
The design of the Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks allowsthem to be mounted side by side and/or in tandem.
The system illustrated below has been set up to enable an op-erator and a particular arrangement of contact blocks to bespecified by a single type number. Operators and contactblocks will be shipped completely assembled.
EXAMPLE: A Type KR1B push button with 2 Type KA1 contactblocks would be Class 9001 Type KR1BH2.
For Types K and SK
Suffix No.(Add to
OperatorType No.)
Positions
1 2 3 4 5 6
H1H2H3H4H5H6H7H8H9
H10H11H12H13H14H15H16H17H18H19
KA1KA1KA1KA1KA2KA3KA2KA3KA4KA4KA1KA2
KA2KA2KA1KA3KA1
KA1KA1KA1
KA2KA3KA1KA5KA1KA3KA1KA3KA3KA3KA1KA1KA1
KA1KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2KA3KA1
KA1
KA1KA3
KA3
KA1KA3KA1
H21 KA2 KA3
H23H24H25H26H27H28H29
KA1KA1KA5KA1KA3KA1KA1
KA1KA2KA3KA1KA3KA3KA4
KA1
KA4KA3
KA1
KA1
KA5
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
H31H32H33H34
KA2
KA1KA5
KA2KA1KA3KA1
KA1
KA3KA1
H36H37H38H39H40H41H42H43H44H45H46H47H48
KA3KA3KA5KA1KA3KA1KA2KA3KA1KA2KA5KA1
KA2KA2KA2KA1KA1KA2KA1KA2KA2KA2KA2KA3KA1
KA3
KA2KA2
KA3
KA3KA4
KA2KA3KA4KA2KA2
KA3KA2KA2KA5KA4
KA3 KA3
H50H51H52H53H54H55H56H57H58H59H60H61H62H63H64
KA5KA5KA3KA4KA4KA1KA2KA5
KA1KA1KA2KA1KA1KA3
KA3KA3KA1KA2KA5KA2KA2KA4KA5KA2KA2KA2KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA2KA2KA2
KA1KA1KA5KA3KA3KA2
KA3KA4
KA2
KA5
KA1
KA3
Top View
“H” Numbers not shown in their sequence are no longer used.
t The mushroom guard has finger holes for pushpull operators. B=Black G=Green R=Red Y=Yellow R=Red Y=Yellow
Mushroom Button Guards
AluminumMushroom
Guard for 13/8"Mushroom
ButtonOperator
(KR4, KR24)
Yellow PlasticExtendedMushroomGuard for 13/8"
MushroomButtonOperators
AluminumMushroom
Guard for 21/4"Mushroom
ButtonOperator
Type Type Used On Type Used On
K48 K56 KR4, SKR4 K68 KR5
K56Mt KR8, KR9, SKR8,SKR9 K685 KR25
Padlock AttachmentsUsed On Description Type
For Type K non- illumi-nated push button — Std. or mushroom (KR4, KR5 mushroom buttons only).
Holds button in depressed position . . . and can be padlocked.
K4
Type K5For Types K and SK non-illuminated push buttons with or without protective boots.
Holds button in depressed position when padlocked.
K5
Type K97
K97
For Types K and SK non-illuminated push buttons, cover type attachment.
Attachment can be padlocked. Does not hold button in depressed position.
K6
For Types K and SK push-pull operator and illuminated push buttons.
Holds button in depressed position . . . and can be padlocked.
K62
For Types K and SK push buttons, cover type attachment.
Similar to K6 shown above EXCEPT without lockout provision and with spring loaded cover.
K60
For KR11U and KR12U .
Holds maintained button in depressed position . . . and can be padlocked.
K96
For Type KR9 & SKR9 Push-Pull operators-Non-Illuminated andIlluminated
Holds button in depressed position- Can be padlocked
K162
k Use KU27 for maintained contact push buttons.
Padlock AttachmentsUsed On Description Type
For Types K and SK selector switches (will not work with gloved hand knob) and potentiometers
Cover type attach-ment that can be padlocked to keep unauthorized personnel from tampering with the operator.
K7
For Types K and SK selector switches (will not work with gloved hand knob) and potentiometers
Same as 9001 K7 except that this lockout is spring loaded.
K107
For Types K and SK illuminated push buttons (with or without guard) and key operated push buttons
Cover type attach-ment that can be padlocked to keep unauthorized personnel from tampering with the operator.
K108
For Types K and SK illuminated push buttons (with or without guard) and key operated push buttons
Same as 9001 K108 except that this lockout is spring loaded.
K109
For Types K and SK maintained push-pull operators using 13/8" dia. mushroom buttons (-20 series as shown on Page 15-72).
Cover type attach-ment that holds mushroom button in depressed position and can be padlocked.
K110
Protective Boots
KU1 KU17 KU37 KU27
These Type KU protective boots are not required for UL Type 4 rating on the Type K operators or UL Type 4 or 4X rating on the Type SK operators. Protective boots are still recommended for very dirty environments or severe hose down. The K1 (see Page 15-73) wrench is required for installation of these boots.
For Non-IlluminatedPush Buttonsk Clear Color for Type
Color Type Standard Knob Selector Switch KU17
BlackRedBlueBrownGreenYellowClearClear(Provides Full Guard)
KU1KU2KU3KU4KU5KU6KU7KU8
Gloved Hand Cap for use on std.knob Selector Switch KU18
Standard Pilot Light and Maintained Contact Push Buttons KU27
Push-to-Test and Illuminated Push Button Without Guard KU37
Illuminated Push But. With Guard KU47
j Meets UL and NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 12 and 13.q Meets UL and NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13.
Maximum Contact Block Usage(Includes Types K and SK)
2 blocks mounted side by side only: Any 2, 3 or 4 position springreturn selector switch (non-illuminated, illuminated or keyed).
2 blocks mounted in tandem on one side only: Any 2 operatorinterlocked push button.
2 blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks): Any selectorpush button, keyed push button, 2, 3, or 4 position maintainedselector switch (non-illuminated, illuminated or keyed), pushpull operators (non-illuminated or illuminated), joy stick, dualpush button.
3 blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks): Single mo-mentary push buttons (non-illuminated or illuminated).
Non Hazardous Locations
TypesK, SK
FileCCN
E42259NKCR
FileClass
LR254903211 03 Marking
Hazardous Locations (see page 98)
TypesK, SK
FileCCN
E10054NNOIV
FileClass
LR268173218 02 Marking
Operator Service Temperature Range:-22 °F to + 140 °F at 50% relative humidity-30 °C to + 60 °C
Environmental Ratings:Types K: The Type K (Series H) operators are UL approved
for use in Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 flat surface enclosures.
Type SK: The Type SK operators are UL approved for use inTypes 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6, 12 and 13 flat surface enclosures.
Types K, SK: For hazardous location use — see page 98.
Dimensions:Types K and SK: See pages 107-108.
Mounting Hole Dimensions:See page 101.
Minimum Centerline Spacing:Types K and SK: See page 101.
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.
.
➀ Operator can be converted to an illuminated operator by removing the liner (6509704901) and adding a light module.➁ Operator can be converted to a non-illuminated operator by adding liner (6509704901).➂ Operator includes jumper wires for push-to-test conversion.➃ These operators can be supplied with 13/8" or 21/4" dia. mushroom buttons. For 13/8": Add 20 to type number. The refers to the color chosen - see page 74, 88, or 105.
For 21/4": Add 21 to type number. The refers to the color chosen - see page 74, 88, or 105. Voids UL and NEMA Type 6 Rating.
Basic Operators(Does not include Color Caps, Mushroom Buttons, Knobs, Selector Switch Cams, Contact Blocks, Light Modules or Legend Plates)
Type K Operator Materials:Push Button and Push To Test Pilot Light(Types KR and KT)
Gasket – NitrileSeal – NitrileSeal Cap – Amorphous AcetalDecorative Ring – Polyester FilmCompensating Washer – PolypropyleneLock Ring – Amorphous NylonStem – Thermoplastic PolyesterBase Cap – Thermoplastic PolyesterKnob – PolycarbonateLiner – PolypropyleneHold Down Spring for Type K-15 – NeopreneOperator Base – ZincOperator Base (KR8) – PolyesterReturn Spring – Music Wire or Stainless Steel (KT only)Ring Nuts – Aluminum or ZincSpringkeeper – SteelLocking Thrust Washer – ZincColor Insert – Polyethylene
➀ Includes one each of the following color inserts: Black, Red, Green, Yellow, Orange, Blue,and White.
➁ “EMERGENCY STOP” is in raised letters and hot stamped white across the front of themushroom button.
➂ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR1U or SKR1U to forma 9001 KR4 or SKR4.
➃ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR1U or SKR1U to forma 9001 KR5 or SKR5.
➄ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR20 to form a 9001KR24 or SKR20 to form a 9001 SKR24.
➅ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR20 to form a 9001KR25 or a SKR20 to form a 9001 SKR25.
➆ These color caps are opaque and are for use on non–illuminated operators only.➇ Includes two of each of the following color inserts: Black, Red, and Green.➈ May be used on KR8 and KR9 operators. Order mushroom button and K54 adapter (no
charge) from page 106. Using the K54 adapter voids Type 6 rating.➉ Red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” marked on top of knob.
Description Color Type PackageQty.
Color inserts forKR1, KR2, KR3, SKR1,
SKR2, SKR3, KR11,KR12, SKR11, SKR12,
KRD, T, TRD
BlackBlueGray
GreenOrange
RedUniversal ➀
WhiteYellow
T6BKT6BET6GYT6GNT6OET6RDT6U
T6WHT6YW
101010101010101010
13/8'' Snap-inMushroom knob
for KR4 and SKR4 ➂
BlackBlue
GreenOrange
RedRed ➁Yellow
K16BK16LK16GK16SK16R
K16R05K16Y
1111111
21/4" Snap-inMushroom knob
for KR5 and SKR5 ➃
BlackBlue
GreenOrange
RedRed ➁Yellow
K17BK17LK17GK17SK17R
K17R05K17Y
1111111
13/8" Screw-onMushroom knob
for KR24 and SKR24➄
BlackBlue
GreenOrange
RedYellow
K92BK92LK92GK92SK92RK92Y
111111
21/4" Screw-onMushroom knob
for KR25 and SKR25 ➅
BlackBlue
GreenOrange
RedYellow
K93BK93LK93GK93SK93RK93Y
111111
15/8" Push-Pull Knobs for KR8,KR9, SKR8, SKR9 Operators
AmberBlack ➆
BlueClearGreen
Orange ➆Red
Red ➉WhiteYellow
A22B23L22C22G22S23R22
R2205W22Y22
1111111111
Color Inserts forDual Function Operators
KR6, KR7, KR67
BlackGreenRed
Universal ➇
B19G19R19U19
10101010
Standard ColorCaps for Illuminated
Push ButtonsK1L, K2L, K3L, SK1L, SK2L
AmberBlueClearGreenRed
WhiteYellow
A7L7C7G7R7W7Y7
1111111
Description Color Type PackageQty.
13/8" Mushroom Knob for Illuminated Push Buttons
K2L, SK2L ➈
AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow
A20L20C20G20R20W20Y20
1111111
21/4" MushroomKnob for Illuminated
Push ButtonsK2L, SK2L ➈
AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow
A21L21C21G21R21 W21Y21
1111111
Plastic FresnelPilot Light Lens
for KP, KT, SKP, SKT
AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow
A31L31C31G31R31W31Y31
1111111
Domed PlasticPilot Light Lens
for KP, KT, SKP, SKT
AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow
A9L9C9G9R9W9Y9
1111111
Glass Pilot LightLens for KP, KT
AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow
A6L6C6G6R6W6Y6
1111111
Standard Selector Switch Knob for K and SKSelector Switches
AmberBlack ➆
BlueClearGreen
Orange ➆ RedWhiteYellow
A8B11L8C8G8S11R8W8Y8
111111111
Gloved Hand Selector Switch Knob for K and SKSelector Switches
AmberBlack ➆
BlueClearGreen
Orange ➆ RedWhiteYellow
A24B25L24C24G24S25R24W24Y24
111111111
Coin Operated SelectorSwitch Knob for K and SK
Selector Switches
Black ➆BlueClearGreen RedYellow
B18L16C16G16R16Y16
111111
Color Inserts for KQand TQ Selector
Push Buttons
BlackBlue
GreenOrange RedWhiteYellow
T5BKT5BET5GNT5OET5RDT5WHT5YW
10101010101010
Cam Type
Selector Switch Cams
BCDEFGHJLM
K13BK13CK13DK13EK13FK13GK13HK13JK13L
3105402402
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmReplacement Parts
➀ Maintained button of two button operator.➁ Momentary button of two button operator.➂ Secondary ring nut (holds knob on selector switch or potentiometer).
➃ GE44 and GE755 are interchangeable (GE755 gives longer life). If a GE-44 lamp is ordered,a GE755 (2550101020) will be substituted. For a replacement lamp in a current series lightmodule see the light module listing on page 96.
➄ Allows Type -20 and -21 mushroom color caps to be used on push pull operators. Use of9001 K54 voids Type 6 rating.
Repair PartsDescription Part Number
E10 KeyE11 through E33 keysD10 KeyMaster Key for E36 – E60Gray cap for KR11, KR12, SKR11, or SKR12Clear plastic top (only) for 9001 K44 & SK44
Ring NutGasket for Type K and SK Push-Pull KnobGasket for Plastic Illuminated LensGasket for Type K and SK selector switch knobBlack Compensating Gasket (Type K and SK
Operators)Liner for Non Illuminated OperatorsLocking Thrust Washer Nylon SpacerLocking Thrust Washer (Std. Type SK Operator)Push Pull Mushroom Adapter ➄Rubber Boot for JoystickKnob on Joysticks without latch
2941101100Refer to page 822940601100294115199031052170014487D63XI
KU Replacement Ring Nuts (Threaded Inside and Out)Used On Part Number
KU1 through KU8, KU27, KU37, KU47 3105204101
KU17, KU18 3105205901
InterlockFor mechanically interlocking two push buttons so that only one button can be depressed at a time. A Type K3 attachment is furnished with the 9001 KR11, KR12, SKR11, SKR12, SKRU1 and SKRU11 operators. However, maintained operators are supplied here and the K3 interlock serves to release one of the buttons when the other is depressed. When used with momentary contact buttons, the K3 interlock does not hold the buttons in the depressed position. It simply prevents pushing both buttons at the same time.The Type K3 interlock can be mounted behind the operators, or behind Type KA contact blocks as shown. Operators and blocks not included.
Type
K3
Screwdriver
Used to tighten mounting screws oncontact blocks and light modules.
Type No.
K69
Wrench
K95 K1
Where Used Type
For tightening ring nuts on Types K, KX, SK and J control units K95
For protective cap kits K1
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
The operators listed below come complete with color caps, legend inserts/plates, contact blocks, and light modules (illuminatedoperators only) and can be ordered using the short type number. If the operator you desire is not listed below, see pages 110through 119. For a component breakdown of each of the operators listed on this page, refer to Product Data M-603.
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
Buttons are mechanically interlocked.
Description ButtonColor
LegendMarking Contacts Type
Number
Non-Illuminated
GreenRed
StartStop
KXRA101KXRA102
Green Start KXRA133
Red Stop KXRA134
RedMushroom
Emerg.Stop KXRN105
RedMushroom
Emerg.Stop KXRN135
Illuminated110-120 V,50-60 HzTransf.
GreenRed
StartStop
KXRB103KXRB104
RedMushroom
Emerg.Stop KXRP106
Dual Push Buttons
Description Top Button (#1) Bottom Button (#2) Contacts TypeNumber
Green-Mom.-Start Red-Mom.-Stop KXRC111
Green-Mom.-Start Red-Mom.-Stop KXRC136
Green-Mom.-Up
Green-Mom.-Down
KXRD112
Green-Mom.-Open
Green-Mom.-Close
KXRD113
Green-Mom.-Fwd.
Green-Mom.-Rev.
KXRD114
Green-Mom.-Up
Green-Mom.-Down
KXRD140
Green-Mom.-Open
Green-Mom.-Close
KXRD141
Green-Mom.-Fwd.
Green-Mom.-Rev.
KXRD142
Green-Maint.-Start
Red-Maint.-Stop
KXRE115
Green-Mom.-Reset
Red-Maint.-Stop
KXRF116
Dual Push Button With One Pilot Light
DescriptionTop
Button(#1)
MiddleLens(#2)
BottomButton
(#3)Contacts Type
Number
Pilot Lightat 110-120 V,
50-60 Hz Transf.
Green-Mom.-Start
Red-On
Red-Mom.-Stop KXRG117
Green-Mom.-Start
Red-On
Red-Mom.-Stop KXRG137
GreenMom.
-BlankRed-Blank
Green-Mom.
-Blank KXRH118
Green-Maint.
-StartRed-On
Red-Maint.
-Stop KXRJ119
Green-Mom.-Reset
Red-On
Red-Maint.
-Stop KXRK120
Dual Push Button With Dual Pilot Lights
Description TopButton (#1)
LeftLens (#2)
RightLens (#3)
BottomButton (#4) Contacts Type
Number
Pilot Lightsat 110-120 V,
50-60 Hz Transf.
Green-Mom.-Start
Red-On
Green-Off
RedMom.-Stop KXRL121
White-Mom.-Number 1
White1
Blue2
Blue-Mom.-Number 2 KXRL132
Green-Mom.-Start
Red-On
Green-Off
Red-Mom.-Stop KXRL138
Green-Mom.
-Blank
Red-Blank
Red-Blank
Green-Mom.
-Blank
KXRM122
If all four lamps are illuminated at the same time continuously – do NOT operate above120 Vac.
This information is also available on the Class 9001 Type KX key sheet M-8091 which is available from your local Square D sales office.
Operator Codes and Operator Description
Selector Switches
SASBSCSDSESFSGSHSJSKSLSMSNSOSPSQSRSSSTSVSWSXSYSZ
Non-illuminated – 2 position maintained selector switchNon-illuminated – 2 position spring return from leftNon-illuminated – 2 position spring return from rightNon-illuminated – 3 position maintained selector switchNon-illuminated – 3 position spring return from left to centerNon-illuminated – 3 position spring return from right to centerNon-illuminated – 3 position spring return both sides to centerNon-illuminated – 4 position maintained selector switchIlluminated – 2 position maintained selector switchIlluminated – 2 position spring return from leftIlluminated – 2 position spring return from rightIlluminated – 3 position maintained selector switchIlluminated – 3 position spring return left to centerIlluminated – 3 position spring return right to centerIlluminated – 3 position spring return both sides to centerIlluminated – 4 position maintained selector switchKey Operated – 2 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 1, 2, 3Key Operated – 2 position spring return from left – Key Code 2Key Operated – 2 position spring return from right – Key Code 1Key Operated – 3 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 4-10Key Operated – 3 position spring return left to center – Key Codes 5, 6, 9Key Operated – 3 position spring return right to center – Key Codes 4, 5, 7Key Operated – 3 position spring return both sides to center – Key Code 5Key Operated – 4 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 11, 12, 13, 14
Push Buttons
RARBRCRDRERFRGRHRJRKRLRMRNRP
Standard Single Momentary Push Button – Non-illuminatedStandard Single Momentary Push Button – IlluminatedTwo Momentary Push Buttons with NO InterlockTwo Momentary Push Buttons with InterlockTwo Maintained Push Buttons with InterlockOne Momentary – One Maintained Push Button with InterlockTwo Momentary Push Buttons with NO Interlock and a Single Pilot LightTwo Momentary Push Buttons with Interlock and a Single Pilot LightTwo Maintained Push Buttons with Interlock and a Single Pilot LightOne Momentary – One Maintained Push Button with Interlock and a Single Pilot LightTwo Momentary Push Buttons with NO Interlock and a Dual Pilot LightTwo Momentary Push Buttons with Interlock and a Dual Pilot LightMushroom Single Momentary Push Button – Non-illuminatedMushroom Single Momentary Push Button – Illuminated
Pilot Lights
PAPBPCTATBTCTDTE
Standard Pilot LightStandard Dual Pilot LightStandard Four-Field Pilot LightSingle Push-To-Test Pilot LightSingle Remote Test Pilot LightDual Push-To-Test Pilot LightDual Remote Test Pilot LightRemote Test Four-Field Pilot Light
Potentiometers
BABBBCBD
Operator Only – Single PotOperator with Single PotOperator Only – Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot
1 Yes No 11 Yes No No Yes
2 No Yes 12 No No No Yes
3 Yes Yes 13 Yes No No No
14 Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Yes No No 8 Yes No Yes
5 No Yes No 9 No Yes Yes
6 No No Yes 10 Yes Yes Yes
7 Yes Yes No
Only voltage codes 31, 34, 35 and 38 may be used with KXTE.
Only resistor and full voltage styles may be used with KXTB and KXTD.
Contact Block(s) Required To Obtain These Sequences
2 Position 3 Position 4 Position
1 = Contact Closed 0 = Contact Open
KA – 1 Mtd. on Side 2(Code H13)
1 00 1
0 11 0
1 0 00 1 1
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
1 0 00 1 1
1 0 00 1 1
0 1 01 0 0
1 1 00 0 1
1 0 0 00 0 1 0
KA – 1 Mtd. on Side 1(Code H1)
1 00 1
0 11 0
0 0 11 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
0 1 00 0 1
0 0 11 0 0
1 0 10 1 0
0 0 10 1 0
0 1 11 0 0
0 0 0 10 1 0 0
Use These Cam Codes E D B C D E F G J L M H
With TheseOperatorCodes
SA – SBSJ – SKSR – SS
SC – SLST
SD – SE – SF – SGSM – SN – SO – SPSV – SW – SX – SY
SHSQSZ
Not available with text or with certain operators (see selection in this section).
Color Code Color
RGALWB
RedGreenAmberBlueWhiteBlack
For KXBB
Code Ohms
010203040506070809101112131415163233353637383940
5010025050010002500500010 K25 K50 K100 K250 K500
1.0 Meg2.5 Meg5.0 Meg
1500350035 K75 K750 K200200015 K
For KXBD
CodeOhms
Front Rear
8283858889
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
Not used on standard type pilot lights (KXPA, KXPB, KXPC, KXTB, KXTD, KXTE) or potentiometers (KXBA, KXBB, KXBC, KXBD).See page 122 for Proper H Number
For Use WithSelector Switches
ONLY
For Use WithIlluminated Operators
ONLY
For Use WithKey-operated Selector
Switches ONLY
For Use WithPotentiometers
ONLY
Insert the proper color code(s) for the lens or knob required. For location of color codes,
see table below.
1
123
1
2
12 3
4
121
1 2
43
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Operators
All non-illuminated push buttons are of the no guard type. Tomake the Type KXRA operator a full guard type (does not applyto the KXRN operators), add a shroud from page 119. If legendinserts are required to be assembled into the operator, see in-structions on page 118.
Momentary operators on this page will accept up to three TypeKA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks).
Maintained operators on this page will accept up to two TypeKA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks).
Add 2 color codes from button cover table. See example below.
Example:
To get a Dual Push Button similar to a 9001KXRCGR except the top button is blue, order a 9001KXRCLR.
Description ButtonType
ButtonCoverColor
TypeNumber
Single ButtonMomentary
Standard
No CoverGreenRed
AmberWhiteBlue
KXRAKXRAGKXRARKXRAAKXRAWKXRAL
Mushroom
No CoverRed
GreenAmberWhiteBlue
KXRNKXRNRKXRNGKXRNAKXRNWKXRNL
Description ButtonType
MechanicalInterlock
Button CoverColor Type
Number(1)Top
(2)Bottom
Dual Push Button(Non–illuminated
Only)
BothMomentary No
NoneGreenAmberAmberOther
NoneRedRed
GreenOther
KXRCKXRCGRKXRCARKXRCAGKXRC
BothMomentary Yes
NoneGreenGreenRed
AmberOther
NoneRed
GreenRed
AmberOther
KXRDKXRDGRKXRDGGKXRDRRKXRDAAKXRD
BothMaintained Yes
NoneGreenGreenRed
AmberOther
NoneRed
GreenRed
AmberOther
KXREKXREGRKXREGGKXRERRKXREAAKXRE
Top ButtonMomentary
Bottom ButtonMaintained
Yes
NoneGreenGreenGreenOther
NoneRed
GreenAmberOther
KXRFKXRFGRKXRFGGKXRFGAKXRF
Two required per operator. When ordering an assembled operator — specify two codenumbers. The first code will be assembled into #1 and the second code will be assembledinto #2.
Not available with text.
Example:
Class 9001 Type KXRAG with a KA1 contact block is Type KXRAGH13. Types KA1 and KA3 NC contacts are direct opening
All illuminated push buttons are of the no guard type. To makethem a full guard type (does not apply to the KXRP operators),add a shroud from page 119. If legend inserts are required to beassembled into the operators, see instructions on page 118.
Momentary operators on this page will accept up to three TypeKA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks).
Maintained operators on this page will accept up to two Type KAcontact blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks).
To order operators with color caps other than those listed below,substitute the proper color code from the Button Cover Table.
Example:
To get a Dual Push Button/Single Pilot Light similar to a 9001 KXRG1GGR exceptthe pilot light is white, order a 9001 KXRG1GWR.
Insert the proper voltage code from page 116 (single lamp).
Insert the proper voltage code from page 116 (single lamp).
Description ButtonType
MechanicalInterlock Voltage Button
Cover ColorType
Number
TwoPush Buttons
(1 & 3)One PilotLight (2)
BothMomentary No
No Light Module No Covers KXRG
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoversGreen-Red-RedGreen-Green-RedGreen-Amber-Red
KXRG1KXRG1GRRKXRG1GGRKXRG1GAR
OtherVoltages No Covers KXRG
BothMomentary Yes
No Light Module No Covers KXRH
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoversGreen-Red-GreenGreen-Amber-GreenRed-Green-Red
KXRH1KXRH1GRGKXRH1GAGKXRH1RGR
OtherVoltages No Covers KXRH
BothMaintained Yes
No Light Module No Covers KXRJ
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoversGreen-Red-RedGreen-Green-RedGreen-Amber-Red
KXRJ1KXRJ1GRRKXRJ1GGRKXRJ1GAR
OtherVoltages No Covers KXRJ
TopMomentary
BottomMaintained
Yes
No Light Module No Covers KXRK
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoversGreen-Red-RedGreen-Green-RedGreen-Amber-Red
KXRK1KXRK1GRRKXRK1GGRKXRK1GAR
OtherVoltages No Covers KXRK
Description ButtonType Voltage Button
Cover ColorType
Number
SingleButton
Momentary
Standard
No Light Module No Cover KXRA
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoverGreenRedAmberWhiteBlue
KXRB1KXRB1GKXRB1RKXRB1AKXRB1WKXRB1L
OtherVoltages
No CoverGreenRed
KXRB
KXRB
GKXRB
R
Mushroom
No Light Module No Cover KXRN
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoverRedGreenAmberWhiteBlue
KXRP1KXRP1RKXRPIGKXRPIAKXRPIWKXRPIL
OtherVoltages
No CoverRedGreen
KXRP
KXRP
RKXRP
G
Not available with text.
Insert the proper voltage code from page 117 (dual lamp).
Shown below is a simplified method of selecting a selectorswitch to meet almost any combination of contact sequences.
Step No. 1
Determine the contact sequence(s) required. Set up a targettable like the one shown for the example below.
Step No. 2
Look for a cam type common to all sequences in Table 1, 2 or3. For the example above, Table 2 would be used. For the con-tact sequences A(1 0 0), B(0 1 0) and C(0 0 1) of the exampleabove, cam types F and L are common to all 3 sequences.
Step No. 3
Next, the cam type common to all the sequences (If severalcam types are common, choose one.) is used to find the oper-ator type number. Go to the proper page number as indicatedin the table below:
If for the example above:
A manual return operator with a standard black knob is required andIf the F cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:
Type KX Line – Class 9001 Type KXSDFB (from page 115)If the L cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:
Type KX Line – Class 9001 Type KXSDLB (from page 115)
Step No. 4:
Determine the contact blocks required by using the same tableused for Step No. 2.
If for the example above:
The F cam type were chosen:
A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or 2 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
The L cam type were chosen:
A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or a 9001 KA3 mounted on side no.2 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
One Type KA1 double circuit block can be used in place of oneType KA2 single circuit block and one Type KA3 single circuitblock mounted on the same side.
Add form number to standard type number, example: Type KXSMC1 Form Y178.
Two Color Selector Switch Kit
— Used to indicate red in left position and green in right position and off in the center on 3 position illuminated selector switches.
Used With
Factory Assembled Form No.
2 pos. s/s3 pos. s/s
Y178Y178
Selector Switch Knobs
For Use On Color TypeNumber Code
All SelectorSwitch
OperatorsEXCEPT
KeyOperated
BlackGreenRed
AmberBlueWhite
KXAB6KXAG6KXAR6KXAA6KXAL6KXAW6
BGRALW
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
The selector switches listed below do not include a legend plate. Legend plates are required to be assembled into the opera-tors. Maintained selector switches will accept up to two Type KA contact blocks mounted in tandem (a total of four blocks). Springreturn selector switches will accept a maximum of two Type KA contact blocks mounted side by side. To order a selector switchwith a knob other than black, substitute the proper color code from the selector switch knob table. Example: To get a selector switch similar to a 9001KXSDCB except with a red knob, order a KXSDCR.
Note: All key operated selector switches are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 key change. See 30 mm push buttons types K and SK page 85 for other key changes. Insert the proper key withdrawal code from the table below. Insert the proper color code from the selector switch knob table below. Insert proper voltage code from page 116.
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Contact Block(s)Required To ObtainThese Sequences
1 = Contact Closed 0 = Contact Open 4 Position2 Position 3 Position
Left Right Left Right CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
KA-1 Mtd. on Side 2(Code H13)
1 00 1
0 11 0
1 0 00 1 1
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
1 0 00 1 1
1 0 00 1 1
0 1 01 0 0
1 1 00 0 1
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
KA-1 Mtd. on Side 1(Code H1)
1 00 1
0 11 0
0 0 11 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
0 1 00 0 1
0 0 11 0 0
1 0 10 1 0
0 0 10 1 0
0 1 11 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
CAM E D B C D E F G J L M HManual Return – Operator OnlyWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther ColorsKey Operated
KXSAEKXSAEBKXSAEKXSRE
....
....
....
....
KXSDBKXSDBBKXSDBKXSVB
KXSDCKXSDCBKXSDCKXSVC
KXSDDKXSDDBKXSDDKXSVD
KXSDEKXSDEBKXSDEKXSVE
KXSDFKXSDFBKXSDFKXSVF
KXSDGKXSDGBKXSDGKXSVG
KXSDJKXSDJBKXSDJKXSVJ
KXSDLKXSDLBKXSDLKXSVL
KXSDMKXSDMBKXSDMKXSVM
KXSHHKXSHHBKXSHHKXSZH
Spring Return from LeftWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 2 Only)
KXSBEKXSBEBKXSBEKXSSE
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....Spring Return from RightWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 1 Only)
....
....
....
....
KXSCDKXSCDBKXSCDKXSTD
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....Spring Return – Left to CenterWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 5, 6, or 9 Only)
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSEBKXSEBBKXSEBKXSWB
KXSECKXSECBKXSECKXSWC
KXSEDKXSEDBKXSEDKXSWD
KXSEEKXSEEBKXSEEKXSWE
KXSEFKXSEFBKXSEFKXSWF
KXSEGKXSEGBKXSEGKXSWG
KXSEJKXSEJBKXSEJKXSWJ
KXSELKXSELBKXSELKXSWL
KXSEMKXSEMBKXSEMKXSWM
....
....
....
....Spring Return – Right to CenterWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 4, 5, or 7 Only)
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSFBKXSFBBKXSFBKXSXB
KXSFCKXSFCBKXSFCKXSXC
KXSFDKXSFDBKXSFDKXSXD
KXSFEKXSFEBKXSFEKXSXE
KXSFFKXSFFBKXSFFKXSXF
KXSFGKXSFGBKXSFGKXSXG
KXSFJKXSFJBKXSFJKXSXJ
KXSFLKXSFLBKXSFLKXSXL
KXSFMKXSFMBKXSFMKXSXM
....
....
....
....
Spring Return – Both Sides to CenterWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 5 Only)
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSGBKXSGBBKXSGBKXSYB
KXSGCKXSGCBKXSGCKXSYC
KXSGDKXSGDBKXSGDKXSYD
KXSGEKXSGEBKXSGEKXSYE
KXSGFKXSGFBKXSGFKXSYF
KXSGGKXSGGBKXSGGKXSYG
KXSGJKXSGJBKXSGJKXSYJ
KXSGLKXSGLBKXSGLKXSYL
KXSGMKXSGMBKXSGMKXSYM
....
....
....
....
Illuminated Selector SwitchesManual ReturnWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
KXSJEKXSJERKXSJE
....
....
....
KXSMBKXSMBRKXSMB
KXSMCKXSMCRKXSMC
KXSMDKXSMDRKXSMD
KXSMEKXSMERKXSME
KXSMFKXSMFRKXSMF
KXSMGKXSMGRKXSMG
KXSMJKXSMJRKXSMJ
KXSMLKXSMLRKXSML
KXSMMKXSMMRKXSMM
KXSQHKXSQHRKXSQH
Spring Return from LeftWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
KXSKEKXSKERKXSKE
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....Spring Return from RightWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
....
....
....
KXSLDKXSLDRKXSLD
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....Spring Return – Left to CenterWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSNBKXSNBRKXSNB
KXSNCKXSNCtRKXSNC
KXSNDKXSNDRKXSND
KXSNEKXSNERKXSNE
KXSNFKXSNFRKXSNF
KXSNGKXSNGRKXSNG
KXSNJKXSNJRKXSNJ
KXSNLKXSNLRKXSNL
KXSNMKXSNMRKXSNM
....
....
....Spring Return – Right to CenterWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSOBKXSOBRKXSOB
KXSOCKXSOCRKXSOC
KXSODKXSODRKXSOD
KXSOEKXSOERKXSOE
KXSOFKXSOFRKXSOF
KXSOGKXSOGRKXSOGv
KXSOJKXSOJRKXSOJ
KXSOLKXSOLRKXSOL
KXSOMKXSOMRKXSOM
....
....
....Spring Return – Both Sides to CenterWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSPBKXSPBRKXSPB
KXSPCKXSPCRKXSPC
KXSPDKXSPDRKXSPD
KXSPEKXSPERKXSPE
KXSPFKXSPFRKXSPF
KXSPGKXSPGRKXSPG
KXSPJKXSPJRKXSPJ
KXSPLKXSPLRKXSPL
KXSPMKXSPMRKXSPM
....
....
....
Key Withdrawal Codes — The key withdrawal code numbers listed below indicate the positions in which the key can be withdrawn (removed) from the selector switch.
2-Position Switches 4-Position Switches
Code Code
1 Yes No 11 Yes No No Yes2 No Yes 12 No No No Yes3 Yes Yes 13 Yes No No No
14 Yes Yes Yes Yes3-Position Switches
Code Code
4 Yes No No 8 Yes No Yes5 No Yes No 9 No Yes Yes6 No No Yes 10 Yes Yes Yes7 Yes Yes No
CAMSCam Type
BCDEFGHJLM
K13BK13CK13DK13EK13FK13GK13HK13JK13L
3105402402
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Pilot Lights
If all four lamps are illuminated at the same time continuously — DO NOT operate above 120 Vac. Remote Test Pilot Lights are AC only. Use only full voltage or resistor assembly code. Do not use trans-former.
➀ Add the voltage assembly code number in the type number. Example: KXTD➀RG with a 60 Vac voltage = KXTD37RG.➁ Add the color codes from the button cover table below. Example: KXPB1➁➁ with a white and blue button cover = KXPB1WL.
2 and 4 Lamp Pilot Lights – These operators include blank legend inserts For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
Description Voltage andFrequency Style
With 1 = Red 2 = Green
Type
With1 = Red 2 = Red
3 = Green 4 = Green
With Other Button CoverColors Type ➁
Without Button CoverType
Type KXPBDual Lamp Pilot Light
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
28 Vac-dc
TransformerTransformerFull Voltage
KXPB1RGKXPB7RGKXPB35RG
....
....
....
KXPB1➁➁KXPB7➁➁KXPB35➁➁
KXPB1KXPB7KXPB35
See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency and Assembly Codes➀
TransformerFull Voltage
Resistor
KXPB➀RGKXPB➀RGKXPB➀RG
....
....
....
KXPB➀➁➁KXPB➀➁➁KXPB➀➁➁
KXPB➀KXPB➀KXPB➀
Type KXTCDual Lamp Push-To-
Test Pilot Light
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
28 Vac-dc
TransformerTransformerFull Voltage
....
....
....
KXTC1RRGGH2KXTC7RRGGH2KXTC35RRGGH2
KXTC1➁➁➁➁H2KXTC7➁➁➁➁H2KXTC35➁➁➁➁H2
KXTC1H2KXTC7H2KXTC35H2
See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency
and Assembly Codes➀
TransformerFull Voltage
Resistor
....
....
....
KXTC➀RRGGH2KXTC➀RRGGH2KXTC➀RRGGH2
KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2
KXTC➀H2KXTC➀H2KXTC➀H2
Type KXTDDual Lamp Remote
Test Pilot Light
120 Vac Resistor KXTD38RG .... KXTD38➁➁ KXTD38
See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency and Assembly Codes➀
Full VoltageResistor KXTD➀RG .... KXTD➀➁➁ KXTD➀
Type KXPC (4 Lamp) Type KXTE
(Remote Test 4 Lamp)
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz24 Vac-dc
TransformerResistor
....
....KXPC1RRGG
KXPC35RRGGKXPC1➁➁➁➁
KXPC35➁➁➁➁KXPC1
KXPC35
See Table Below For Other Voltages And Assembly Codes ➀
Full Voltageor Resistor
....
.... KXPC➀RRGG KXPC➀➁➁➁➁ KXPC➀
See Table Below For Other Voltages And Assembly Codes ➀
Full Voltageor Resistor .... KXTE➀RRGG KXTE➀➁➁➁➁ KXTE➀
Voltage Description For Use with Dual or Four Lamp Operators As Indicated
➂ Each KXAC28 includes a clear cover and 1 each of all colors. Only 1-KXAC28 should berequired per KXPB operator –unless the same color is required for #1 and #2 – then 2-KXCA28 should be ordered.
➃ When specifying color codes – the first will be installed in #1 and the second in #2. ➄ Each KXAC48 includes a clear cover and 1 each of all colors. Only 1-KXCA48 should be
required per KXPC operator –unless the same color is required for more than 1 position. If2 of the same colors are required – order 2-KXAC48, etc.
➅ When specifying color codes — the first will be installed in #1, the second in #2, the third in#3 and the fourth in #4.
These legend inserts are for the pilot lights in the center of the operator. These legend inserts are for the push button portion of the operator. These Legend Inserts have Vertical Printing.
All Type KX push buttons and pilot lights have a blank insert asstandard. These blank inserts can be custom marked using amarking pen, a mechanical lettering set, press letters, or a tapelettering machine that marks a tape which can then be trans-ferred to the blank insert.
To have legend inserts installed into the operators, order theoperator as normal and then tell where to install the legendinserts using the numbered positions shown on the operatorordered.
Example: 9001KXRL1GRGRH2 with a9001KXN 401 in pos. 19001KXN 503 in pos. 29001KXN 504 in pos. 39001KXN 402 in pos. 4
Letter Height For Standard LegendsKXN100KXN200KXN300KXN400KXN500KXN600KXN700
1⁄4 Inch (6 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)
1⁄8 Inch (3 mm)1⁄8 Inch (3 mm)
Maximum Number of Lines and Charactersfor Type KXN Legend Inserts
LetterHeight Number of KXN199 KXN299
HorizontalKXN299Vertical KXN399 KXN499 KXN599
1⁄4"(6 mm)
CharactersPer Line 7 7 3 7 7 3
Lines PerLegend Insert 4 2 4 1 1 1
3⁄16"(4.75 mm)
CharactersPer Line 9 9 4 9 9 4
Lines PerLegend Insert 5 2 6 2 1 2
1⁄8"(3 mm)
CharactersPer Line 14 14 5 14 14 6
Lines PerLegend Insert 8 4 9 3 2 3
Maximum Number of Lines and Charactersfor Type KXN699 and KXN799 Legend Plates
Position LetterHeight
Characters PerMarking Area
A and C B
3⁄16"(4.75 mm) 6 6
1⁄8"(3 mm) 8 9
3⁄16"(4.75 mm) 10 5
1⁄8"(3 mm) 13 7
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
① Dial Plate only – Order Class 9001 Type KXN905. ② Uses same potentiometer as Class 9001 Type K and SK. Potentiometer shaft diameter = 1/4" (6 mm), length = 7/8" (22 mm)Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Marked.
Transparent boot with knob used on selector switches to exclude
harmful contaminants.
All KX selector switches and potentiometer
operators (except key op.)
BlackRed
Green
KXAKU17BKXAKU17RKXAKU17G
Potentiometer (With Dial Plate) ①② Watts Description Type No.
2
Operator only — Single PotOperator with Single Pot
Operator only — Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot
KXBAKXBBKXBC
KXBD
Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.Example: Type KXBB05 or KXBD85
Suffix Ohms Suffix Ohms Suffix
Ohms SuffixOhms
Front Rear
01023803040532390633
50100200250500
10001500200032003500
0708400935103611
500010 K15 K25 K 35 K50 K75 K100 K
121337141516
250 K500 K750 K
1.1 Meg2.2 Meg5.0 Meg
8283858889
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
Shrouds
Used to color code the Type KX operators.
Type Used On Color Type No.
FullShroud
All PushButtonsand Pilot
Lights
GrayRed
GreenYellowBlackBlue
KXAK41EKXAK41RKXAK41GKXAK41YKXAK41BKXAK41L
ShortShroud
AnyKX
Operator
GrayRed
GreenYellowBlackBlue
KXAK40EKXAK40RKXAK40GKXAK40YKXAK40BKXAK40L
Basic OperatorsDescription Type
2 pos. maintained2 pos. spring return from right2 pos. spring return from left3 pos. maintained3 pos. spring return from right3 pos. spring return from left3 pos. spring return from both sides4 pos. maintained
KXSAEKXSBEKXSCDKXSDKXSEKXSFKXSGKXSHH
LinerType No.
6508900401
Wrench
Used to tighten ring nut on operators.
Type No.
K95
Lamp and Lens Removal Kit
Used to remove lamp and lens on allilluminated operators and pilot lights.
Type No.
KXALLRT
Screwdriver
Used to tighten mounting screws oncontact blocks and light modules.
Type No.
K69
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmContact Blocks
For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K orSKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For sequenc-ing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.
Minimum order quantity is 25.
Standard Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
(Clear Cover)
KA1
(Green Cover)
KA2
(Red Cover)
KA3
(Clear Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA4
(Red Cover)
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA5
(Green Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA6
Additional Circuit Arrangements Available
SequencingN.O. Contact of
KA4 closes beforeN.O. Contact on KA1 KA4 KA1
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA1
OverlappingN.O. Contact of
KA4 closes before N.C.Contact of KA5 Opens KA4 KA5
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA5
Symbol
Contact BlocksWith Binder Head Screws
(not Fingersafe)
Gold Flashed ContactsWith Standard
Pressure Wire Terminals
Type Quantity Type
KA21 25-Up KA31
KA22 25-Up KA32
KA23 25-Up KA33
N.O. EarlyClosing
KA24 25-Up KA34
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA25 25-Up KA35
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks, But Provide:• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue
connectors• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep
vs. 0.97" deep on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)
• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89.
• Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.
Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts – Types KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
Volts
DC
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type P600)
Make and Break ContinuousCarryingAmperesKA1 KA2
KA3 KA4 KA5KA6
125250600
1.10.550.2
1.10.550.2
1.1..........
1.10.550.2
101010
Volts
AC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600)35% Power Factor
Resistive 75%Power FactorMake, Break
and ContinuousAmperes
Make Break ContinuousCarryingAmperesAmperes VA Amperes VA
120240480600
60301512
7200720072007200
6.03.01.51.2
720720720720
10101010
10101010
FileCCN
E42259NKCR
FileClass
LR 254903211 03
Marking
The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are Fingersafecontact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminalscrews. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of thewiping action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will acceptup to 2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA3, KA31, and KA33 NC contacts are dirct opening.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Reed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information
In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explo-sion-proof equipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control sta-tions. It can save money to know what type of hazardouslocation exists. If you're not sure what type of hazardous loca-tion exists, the “Summary of Classification” Chart may help. Ifnot, contact your local electrical inspector. When you knowwhat class, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in thelower lefthand corner of this page for what Square D has to of-fer.
An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or an in-trinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardous areato a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system, any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can be used. No illu-minated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light, may be used.
Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I,Division 2 hazardous locations.1.Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.2.All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2 areas. 3.Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modulesother than the transformer type. 4.The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.
Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.
For and : UL Listed: File E10054N, CCN NOIV.For : Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.
Summary Of Classification ChartClass Division Group
I. Gas 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmos-phere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
B. Location adjacent to Division 1 location.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases Containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
II. Dust 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmos-phere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
E. Conductive and Combustible Dust (Resistivity <105 ohms/cm)
F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity >102 ohm/cm but ≤108ohm/cm)
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
III. Fibers 1. Production Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
2. Handling and Storage Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
ForUse
Class Division Group(s)I 1 A 1. Intrinsically Safe System
I 1 B, C, D 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System
I 2 A1.
2.
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System
I 2 B, C, D
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System
II 1 E, F, G 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System
II 2 E, F
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System
II 2 G
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System
III 1, 2 ....
1.2.
3.
9001 BR Station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System
All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire.
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operator isas indicated for standard contact blocks, except:
• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M,” mountreed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (eitherside), maximum 2 in tandem.
The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters through NEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.① Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor. ➁ Inductive and Resistive Ratings
Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact BlocksSuitable for use on low energy level circuits
Description Symbol Type
KA41
KA42
KA43
KA44
KA45
Max. Volts AC/DCMaximum Load
Res. Ind. Cont.32/30
120/1000.25A 8 VA
0.10A3 VA
0.5 A0.5 A
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
KA51
KA52
KA53
KA54
KA55
VoltsAC NEMA Type C300①
Make Break ContinuousCarrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
120240
10.005.00
12001200
1.0000.500
120120
3.03.0
VoltsDC NEMA Type Q150
Make Break ContinuousCarrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
115 0.50 58 0.50 58 3.0
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX“H” Numbers
The design of the Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks allowsthem to be mounted side by side and/or in tandem.
The system illustrated below has been set up to enable an op-erator and a particular arrangement of contact blocks to bespecified by a single type number. Operators and contactblocks will be shipped completely assembled.
EXAMPLE: A Type KXRCGR push button with 2 Type KA1 contact blocks would be Class9001 Type KXRCGRH2.
“H” Numbers not shown in their sequence are no longer used.
The Type KX operators are UL and CSA Listed as follows:
The KX operators are rated UL Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6, 12, 13/NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4X, 6, 12, 13 without the use of protectiveboots. Boots are recommended for dirty environments or areasthat are hosed down with water under very high pressure.
Operator Service Temperature Range:-22 °F to +140 °F at 50% relative humidity-30 °C to +60 °C
Mounting Hole For Type KX Control Units
Use Greenlee Tool #60242 for punching mounting hole and notch.
Selector Switch Angular Travel
FileCCN
E42259NKCR
FileClass
25490C3211 03
Maximum Number of Contact Blocks Per OperatorMom. Push Button —Three mounted in tandem for a total of six.
Maint. Push Button —Two mounted in tandem for a total of four.
Selector Switch —Two mounted in tandem for a total of four.
Selector Switch (Non-Illuminated and Illuminated)(KXS)Gasket – NitrileSeal – NitrileSeal Retainer – SteelReturn Spring – Music WireCam Rotor – Celenex 3300Cam Follower – Delrin 100Cam Carrier – TrogamidCam Profile – Delrin 100Bearing – PolyesterBezel – ZincKnob – Polycarbonate or NylonKnob Ring Nut – PolycarbonateKnob Seal – NitrileLegend Plate – ABSPlug Insert – PolyesterKey Plug – Zinc, Brass, Music WireKey – BrassLocking Head – ZincLocking Head Seal – NitrileInsert – ZincAdaptor – ZincAdaptor Mounting Clip – Music WireLiner – NylonRing Nut – Zinc or AluminumTerminals – SteelScrews – Steel
Contact Block Type (KA)Housing– Amorphous NylonContact Slider– Nylon or AcetalTerminal– SteelSaddle Clamp– SteelSpring– SteelContacts– Silver and CopperBlade– Beryllium CopperLabel– Paper
Key Withdrawal Code: See table below for proper code number. All key operated selector switches are furnished as standard with Square D number NQ1101 key.
For replacement key, order9001NQ1101.
No other keys are available.
Fits onto Type TS1 knob.
Selector Switch Operators
–
Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included
Description Contact BlockRequired
1 - Contact Closed 0 - Contact Open
2 Position 3 Position 4 Position
Selector Switch
QuantityandType
Mounton
SideLeft Right Left Right Left Right
Center Center Center Center Center
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
1-KA1#2 1 0
0 11 00 1
0 11 0
1 0 00 1 1
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
1 0 0 00 0 1 0
1-KA1#1 1 0
0 11 00 1
0 11 0
0 0 11 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
0 1 00 0 1
0 0 0 10 1 0 0
CAMA E D B C D E F H
Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return
Standard Black Knob Key Operated
TS1TS1K
. . . . . .
. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .
TS2TS2K
TS3TS3K
TS4TS4K
TS5TS5K
TS6TS6K
TS401
Spring Return - Left to Center
Standard Black Knob Key Operated
. . . . . .
. . . . . .TS14
TS14K2
. . . . . .
. . . . . .TS15
TS15K
TS16TS16K
TS17TS17K
TS18TS18K
TS19TS19K
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Spring Return - Right to Center
Standard Black Knob Key Operated
. . . . . .
. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .
TS27TS27K1
TS511TS21K
TS521TS22K
TS531TS23K
TS541TS24K
TS551TS25K
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Spring Return - Both Sides to Center
Standard Black Knob Key Operated
. . . . . .
. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .TS8
TS8K5TS9
TS9K5TS10
TS10K5TS11
TS11K5TS12
TS12K5. . . . . .. . . . . .
Key Withdrawal Arrangement For Selector Switches
Positions marked “YES” are those in which the key can be withdrawn, locking the switch in that position.
2-Position Switches 3-Position Switches
No. No. No.
1
Yes No
4
Yes No No
8
Yes No Yes
2
No Yes
5
No Yes No
9
No Yes Yes
3
Yes Yes
6
No No Yes
10
Yes Yes Yes
7
Yes Yes No
Selector Push Button Operators
–
Legend Plate And Contact Block Not Included
ContactBlocks
Required
Two Position Operators
1 = Contact Closed F = Free0 = Contact Open D = Depressed
1 — KA1
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D
1 00 1
0 01 1
1 10 0
0 00 1
0 00 1
1 00 0
1 10 0
1 00 1
. . . . . .
. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .
2 — KA1
1 00 1
0 01 1
1 00 1
0 00 1
0 00 1
1 00 0
1 00 1
1 10 0
0 00 1
1 00 1
0 00 1
1 10 0
1 00 1
0 01 1
1 10 0
0 00 1
0 00 1
1 00 0
1 10 0
1 00 1
0 00 1
1 10 0
1 10 0
0 00 1
Cam Z Y R T P S
Half GuardBlack Insert
Full GuardBlack Insert
Extended GuardBlack Insert
TQ1
TQ11
TQ62
TQ2
TQ12
TQ56
TQ36
TQ39
TQ69
TQ26
TQ48
TQ59
TQ42
TQ45
TQ71
TQ50
TQ53
TQ73
Gloved Hand Knob For Selector Switch
Type
T7
Adapter Kit
Allows a Type T Operator to be mounted in Type K mounting hole.
Part Number
3042654250
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmFoundry Duty Operators & Accessories
Locks button in depressed position. Must be used with operator having standard half guard. Can be
used with mushroom buttons.
(Padlock not furnished.) Must be used with operator having standard half guard. (Padlock not furnished.) Locks button (with Type TU cap) in depressed
position. Does not include cap.
Maintained Contact Arrangement
Type
TM1
Use with two Type TR push buttons and one contact block. The contact block should always be assembled to the “Stop”operator. Not for use on illuminated push buttons.
Alternate Action (Push-on Push-off) Module
This module can be added to standard 9001 Type K, KX, SK or T oper-ators. Contact blocks mounted behind this module (maximum of 2) will be held in the depressed position when the operator is operated once and released to their normal position when the operator is operated again.
For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001 KA1 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA4. For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of the 9001KA4 or a 9001KA6.
Type
K85
Screwdriver
Used to tighten mounting screws on Type K contact blocksand light modules.
Type
K69
Protective Cap
The Type TU1 thru 6 cap will prevent metal shavings and other foreign matter from interfering with proper operation of oil tight push buttons. They are for use with the KY, KZ and KYAF enclosures and can be used with TN legend plates.
Color Type
BlackRed
BrownGreenYellow
TU1TU2TU4TU5TU6
Watertight Cap
These caps are for use on the Class 9001 Type KYSS NEMA Type 4 water tight enclosures. To retain the watertight seal (NEMA Type 4), sepa-rately mounted legend plates must be used (not available from Square D).
Color
For Push Buttons
For Selector Sw.
Type Type
BlackRedBlue
BrownGreenYellow
TU11TU12TU13TU14TU15TU16
TU51TU52TU53TU54TU55TU56
Clear Silicone Cap
–For standard pilot lightsFor push to test pilot lights and illuminated push buttons
TU17
TU27
Push Button Wrench
Type
T1
Simplifies installation of Type T units.
Trim Washer
Type
TN5
For use where legend plate is not required. Keeps ringnut from marring panel finish.
Liner
Part Number
310501401
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
These switches are furnished with special contact blocks.
Symbol 104 is same as 103 except contacts A1 and B1 are not furnished.
Three Position Master Switches
Description Symbol Type
3-Position Master Switch, Complete with Contact Block Maintained
Contact Spring Return to Center
103104
TS80E2TS82D1
3-Position Master Switch, Without
Contact Block TS80
Basic Operators
Illuminated Push ButtonWith Full Guard
Less Color Cap And Light Module
Standard Pilot LightLess Color Cap And Light
Module
Illuminated Push ButtonWithout Guard And
Push To Test Pilot LightLess Color Cap, Light Module
And Contact Block
Type Type Type
T1L TP T2L
Maintained Push Button With 1
3
⁄
8
" Mushroom Button
Button locks in the depressed position – Turning knurled ring releases operator to its normal position. Price includes nameplate:
"Push-to-Stop Rotate Collar CW to Start".
Color Type
BlackRed
GreenBrownYellowOrange
Blue
TRM3TRM4TRM20TRM21TRM22TRM23TRM24
Time Delay Push Button
Timing period is adjustable from 0.2 second to 60 seconds and begins after push button has been released. Devices require the space of two standard operators. Devices include a package of seven color inserts for color coding the push button. Contacts are quick make - quick break.
Type listed is half guard version. Legend plate not included.
Description
TimedContact1 N.O. &1 N.C.
Type
TRD150
Correct Drilling For Mounting All Devices
1
7
⁄
32
" diameter hole may be cut with Greenlee knockout punch, No. 60246,available through electrical wholesalers.
Enclosure Minimum Spacings
Type TL1 or TL2 padlock attachments can be added to TR-Type operatorswithout adding to overall dimensions or without interference to otheroperators mounted adjacent.
Type TM1 maintained contact device may be installed on two push buttonunits mounted from 1
1
⁄
16
" (min.) to 2
1
⁄
2
" (max.) apart, arranged either verti-cally or side by side. The contact block should always be assembled to theoperator designated as Stop, Off or Safe.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmLegend Plates & Contact Blocks
All Type T Operators Accept Type KA Blocks. Types KA1 and KA3 N.C. contacts are direct opening.
Type K
SymbolType K Equivalent
Type T
Type Type
KA1 TA
KA2 TA2
KA3 TA1
Type T
TwoTypeKA1
OneTypeTB
TwoTypeKA2
OneTypeTD
TwoTypeKA3
OneTypeTC
2 Pole Double Throw For Tandem Mounting
With Type TB Contact Block Only
Symbol Type
TF
Note: A Special Purpose Block is not required to mount a Type K Block in tandem.
Contact Block Rating — Maximum AC
Type K and Type T
Volts
AC Amperes – NEMA Type A600
Inductive PilotDuty
35% Power Factor
Resistive75%
Power Factor
Make Break ContinuousMake, Break,
andContinuous
120240480600
60301512
63
1.51.2
10101010
10101010
Contact Block Rating – Maximum DC
Volts
Type K Type T
DC Inductive and Resistive DC AmperesInductive Pilot Duty
Make and BreakKA5
ContinuousCarryingAmperes
Makeand
Break
Con-tinuousKA1 KA2
KA3 KA4
120240600
1.10.550.2
1.10.550.2
1.1........
1.10.550.2
101010
2.2........
10........
The maximum number of characters and lines given above is a practical maximum and isbased on a minimum size of characters to facilitate easy reading. When fewer charactersthan the maximum are required the size of the characters is changed to permit the best read-ability.
Dimensions
For dimensions of operators, see Approval Drawing Pads 9001-16, 9001-17, and 9001-18. These can be requested from yourlocal Square D sales office.
Legend Plates
TN-200
Standard legend plate markings and special markings are listed in 30mm Push Buttons Types K and SK – order as Type TN2... or TN3... rather than Type KN.
Example: Legend plate marked “Forward,” order TN206 or TN306.
Special Legend Plates
Description Type
DoubleHeaded
TN4
Extra large
For customer's enclosure only. Minimum
spacing between operators must be 2
5
⁄
16
" vertically and 2
1
⁄
4
" hori-zontally.
TN6
Maximum Number Of Lines And CharactersFor Type TN Legend Plates
Type
TN2 TN3 TN4 TN6
Max. No. of Characters per Line
16 16 16 22
Max. No. of Lines
1 3 2 4
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Base — Chrome plated zinc alloy die castingRing nut, stem and mushroom knob — Anodised aluminiumStem on mushroom head type — Stainless steelReturn spring — Stainless steelSeal washer — Cork/neoprene rubberOperating disc — Zinc plated steelGasket — Buna N rubberColor inserts — PolyethyleneSpring cup — BrassAllen screw on mushroom head — Steel alloy with Zinc oxide finish
Type TS selector switchRing nut, gasket, seal washer, return spring and spring cupsame as Type TR above.
Base and switch knob — Chrome plated zinc alloy die castingShaft — Stainless steelCam — Zinc alloyColor inserts — NylonBall Bearing — Stainless steelBall bearing spring — Stainless steelScrew and lock washer — Zinc plated steel Circlip — Spring steel with black phosphate finishGuide and spacer — Zinc plated steel (spring return type)Seal — Buna N rubber (spring return type)Various pins — Brass or zinc plated steel (spring return type)
Type TSK key operated selector switchAs type TS except as follows:
Base — Bright zinc plated zinc alloy castingRing nut — AluminiumReflector — AluminiumGasket — Buna N rubberLens — Glass in aluminium holder with Buna N rubber seals or
PolycarbonateLabel — PaperLight module — Type KM as supplied by Square D Ashville
Type TP push to test and illuminated push button
Base — Bright zinc plated zinc alloy castingRing nut — AluminiumOperator — Glass filled polyesterSpring support — Zinc plated steelGasket — Buna N rubberSeal — Nitrile rubberSpring — Stainless steelLock ring — TrogamidLens — PolycarbonateLabel — PaperLight module and contact block — Type KM and KA as supplied
provides an interface between the SERIPLEX control bus andany of the Square D Class 9001 Type K, SK, KX and T push but-tons, pilot lights and selector switches (exceptions: 5-positionjoy stick and Type KX multi-lamp operators). Single-bit bus inter-face circuitry is used in this module. If multiplexed operation isused by the CPU interface card, the push button module isscanned every frame. This adaptor module is not capable of be-ing multiplexed (See page 9 for details).
Features
• Can be used with any Type K, SK, KX or T push button, pilotlight or selector switch operator (exceptions: 5-position joystick operators and Type KX multi-lamp operators)
• Performs control for illuminated and non-illuminated push but-ton operators
• Relay output dedicated modules are for illuminated operatorswith a standard Type KM light module
• Bus powered lamp modules don’t require an auxiliary powersupply or additional power conductors
• Bus powered lamp modules use high visibility, low currentconsumption LED lamps, providing long life and greater sys-tem flexibility
• LED indicators provided on all modules showing power-onstatus, input status and output status – a convenient installa-tion and troubleshooting aide
• Modules use quick and easy IDC panel cabling including pre-terminated cable (Catalog #CBL2222P38C05L20)
Assembly and Dimensions
With insulation displacement connector
See page 135 for general purpose ratings.
Contacts Closed = x Contacts Open = o
For additional information, see catalog 8330CT9601R11/96.
Dedicated Modules for Non-illuminated Operators
Catalog Number Input Type Address A Input Type Address B Output Type
9001KA61
N.C. N.O. none
9001KA62
— N.O. none
9001KA63
N.C. — none
Dedicated Modules for Illuminated Operators Using a Class 9001 Type KM Light Module
Catalog Number Input TypeAddress A
Input TypeAddress B
Output TypeAddress B
9001KA60KM
— — Electromechanical Relay
9001KA61KM
N.C. N.O. Electromechanical Relay
9001KA62KM
— N.O. Electromechanical Relay
9001KA63KM
N.C. — Electromechanical Relay
Dedicated Modules Using Bus Powered LED Lamps for Illuminated Operators
Example: To order conformal coating for catalog number 9001KA61, change to 9001KA61T.
The fracture torque leads to damage of the screw shaft, stripping of the thread or deformation of the screw slot.
Options, Replacement Parts and Accessories
Catalog Number Description
SPX30MMXCAM
4-position selector switch cam for use with SERIPLEX modules for 30mm operators
SPXLEDA1
Replacement LED Lamp – amber
SPXLEDG1
Replacement LED Lamp – green
SPXLEDR1
Replacement LED Lamp – red
SPXUSER2
Replacement user label (has marking surface for addresses and control words). Quantity 10.
9001KXALLRT
Lamp Removal Tool
add a ‘
T
’ to the end of a catalog number
Conformal coating. Increases Micro-Environmental Category rating from MEC pollution degree II to MEC pollution degree III, as outlined in IEC 664-1, section 2.5.1. Conformal coating meets MIL-I-46058C.
Specifications
SERIPLEX bus power requirements: Nominal voltage rating Power supply voltage range at 25
°
C
24 Vdc19.2 to 30 Vdc including ripple
Bus power supply current drain (25
°
C, 24 Vdc)
no relay output: 7 mA typicalrelay output: 16 mA typicalbus powered LED lamp: 18 mA typical
Worst case bus power supply current drain (-25
°
C, 30 Vdc)
no relay output: 8 mArelay output: 24 mA bus powered LED lamp: 24 mA
Module capacitance
75 pF typical
Bus clock frequency operating range
10 kHz to 200 kHz
Operating temperature
-25
°
C to +70
°
C (-13
°
F to +158
°
F)
Storage Temperature
-40
°
C to +85
°
C (-40
°
F to +185
°
F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95%, non-condensing
Electromechanical Relay Rating (UL)
250 Vac, 30 Vdc, 2.5 A resistive pilot duty: AC - 180 VA, DC - 15 VA, C300
Micro-environmental category
II (per IEC664-1, Section 2.5.1)
Shock (IEC 68-2-27)
30 g, 3 axes, 11 ms duration, half sine pulse
Vibration (IEC 68-2-6)
10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm peak-to-peak, 2 hour in 3 axes
Noise immunity: Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast transients Impulse
IEC801-2IEC801-3IEC801-4IEC255-4
Compliance standards
UL File E114926, CSA File LR53531 (submitted), NOM-117
Square D offers specialized control packages through the Modified Panels Group. Assemblies can be manufactured to meet your specific design criteria, incorporating special dimensions, enclosure types, and component makeup.
Specific control operator needs can be satisfied with products ranging fromstandard 30 mm push buttons to printed circuit board mounted pilot device assemblies.
In addition, Square D offers the widest variety of control products in numerous enclosure types to meet your electrical, environmental, anddimensional needs. Use of CAD designs, prototype assembly before production, and personalized service insures the product you receive will be exactly what you ordered...Guaranteed.
For additional information or receive a personalized proposal, contact your local Square D sales office.
Standard duty control stations are designed for use with magnetic motor starters to govern the starting, stopping, or reversing of all types of electricmotors. Push buttons are momentary contact unless otherwise indicated. Selector switches are maintained contact.
Control Stations
Many items are stock or can be furnished as a quick ship using a “Universal” station plus accessories.
No.of
UnitsNameplate Markings and Features Contact Symbol
See page 141
Surface MountingNEMA Type 1
t
Stainless SteelFlush Plate
(Pullbox
k
not included)
t
Watertight andDusttight
NEMA Type 4
t
For Hazardous Locations
Class I, Div. I & IIGroups B, C and DClass II Div. I & II
“Universal” designates control stations without legend inserts, lenses or accessory kits. Universal stations plus separate legend inserts and other acces-sories listed on page 139 allow the user to conveniently build up standard or custom stations.
k
Use standard 2.0 or 2.13 inch deep wall boxes, single gang for Types BF1 – and BF2 – and two gang for Type BF3 –.
t
For replacement interiors, see page 140.Replacement enclosures (case and/or cover) are not available for Type BR devices.
Lockout must be factory installed on NEMA Type 4 devices. However, replace-ment covers are available with the lockout feature as standard. See page 139.
Mushroom Caps – Kits do not include legendinsert; order separate legend insert from thetables below.
EX: For red mushroom button marked STOP,order one 9001 Type B301 plus one 9001Type B102.
Lockout Kit – For
NEMA Type 1
surfacemounting stations, bottom unit only. Can beused on either push button or on 2 or 3position selector switch. Lockout cannot beused with mushroom cap.
Contact block assemblies for all Type BG stations include cover and contact block.Replacement contact block assemblies and terminal block wiring receptacles for push buttons have provision for 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. circuit on each button. Unneeded circuits need not be wired.
q
Order separate legend plates, if required, from listing on page 139.
Electrical Contact Ratings
AC – NEMA Type B600 DC – NEMA Type P600
Volts
Inductive
35% Power Factor
Resistive
75% Power FactorVolts
Inductive
and
Resistive
Make Break ContinuousCarryingAmperes
Make, Breakand Continuous
Carrying Amperes
Make andBreak
Amperes
ContinuousCarryingAmperesAmps VA Amps VA
120240480600
30.5 15 7.5 6
3600360036003600
3.751.50.750.6
360360360360
5555
5555
120240600
1.10.550.2
555
Type BGC214(Type BGC contact block
assemblies include cover.)Type BGB214
BOC361
“C” Shaped Mounting Bracketfor 9001 BR Interior
3110112001
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control StationsDimensions
Type K Series A through Series G operators were rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 12, and 13. Type K Series H operators are rated UL Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, and 13.
➁
Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical.
➂
For machine cavity mounting. Pull box not available.
➃
Type KN1, KN6 and KN7 a series of legend plates will not fit on these enclosures.
➄
Standard Type KYSS enclosures are supplied with Type 304 stainless steel — Use Form Y35 and order by description — contact your local Square D sales office.
Custom Built Control Stations
The catalog numbers shown include the enclosure only. A complete assembled control station is the enclosure plus all control units to be installed.
Ordersmust be accompanied with a key sheet (M-7687)
➅
or sketch showing all control units in their desired locations. Specify the marking on thenameplates for the enclosure.
The standard nameplate size is 1.69" (43 mm) by 0.5" (13 mm) inches. It has a black field with white letters. For name-plates other than our standard, contact your local Square D Sales Office. There is an additional charge to move or add an additional conduit hole or changethe diameter of the conduit.
Example:
Add a 1 inch conduit to the top (nonstandard location) of a KY6 enclosure and increase the bottom conduit from 3/4" to 1 inch (19 to 25 mm).There would be an additionall charge for the top conduit and the bottom conduit. If 20 or more identical stations are ordered at one time, there is no ad-ditional charge.
➀
Type K Series A through Series G operators were rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 12, and 13. Type K Series H operators are rated UL Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, and 13.
➁
Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical.
➂
For machine cavity mounting. Pull box not available.
➃
Type KN1, KN6 and KN7 a series of legend plates will not fit on these enclosures.
➄
Standard Type KYSS enclosures are supplied with Type 304 stainless steel — Use Form Y35 and order by description — contact your local Square D sales office.
➅
For a copy of M-7687 keysheet, reference D-Fax
#1143 or see pages 148-149.
Enclosures Only (For Customer Assembly)
No. of Units
UL Types 1, 3 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3 and 13 UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13
➀
UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13
➀
Surface Mounting Flush Mountingwithout Pullbox
➂ ➃
Surface Mounting Surface Mounting
Sheet Steel Cast Zinc Die Cast Aluminum
➃
Stainless Steel (304)
➄
Polymeric (Plastic)
Type Type Type Type Type
123469
1216202530
KYAF1KYAF2KYAF3KYAF4KYAF6KYAF9
KYAF12KYAF16KYAF20KYAF25KYAF30
KZ11KZ21
➁
KZ31
➁
KZ41
➁
KZ6KZ9
KZ12KZ16
Not Avail.Not Avail.Not Avail.
KY1KY2
➁
KY3
➁
KY4
➁
KY6KY9
KY12KY16
Not Avail.Not Avail.Not Avail.
KYSS1KYSS2KYSS3KYSS4KYSS6KYSS9
KYSS12KYSS16KYSS20KYSS25KYSS30
SKY1SKY2SKY3SKY4SKY6SKY9
SKY12SKY16SKY20SKY25
Not Avail.
No. of Units
UL Types1, 3 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3 and 13 UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13
➀
UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13 (1)
Enclosures have sufficient depth to accommodate two contact blocks in tandem (total of four blocks) on non-illuminated operatorsand two contact blocks side-by-side on illuminated operators.
Control stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.
Control station consists of components that are UL Listed for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D.
Assembled Control Stations – UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13
These flush plates accept Type K, SK, KX and T operators andcontact blocks and may be used with a standard 2 x 3 generalpurpose switch box. A 21/2" deep box should be used with twoType K contact blocks mounted side by side. If two Type K con-tact blocks mounted in tandem are needed, a 31/2" deep boxshould be used. Although oiltight/watertight operators are used,an assembled station using the flush plates is not oiltight/wa-tertight. The kits include the stainless steel flush plate, coverscrews and a set of liners. The liners must be used to maintainelectrical clearance.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR ORDERING ASSEMBLED CONTROLSTATIONS1. Use separate Key Sheet for each different control station ar-
rangement on order.
2. Select locations on sketch (reverse side) which illustratemanner in which station is to be mounted. Example: Selec-tion of location A, B, C and D indicates a four unit stationmounted with its long axis vertical and the legend platesmounted accordingly. Selection of locations A, G, N and Uindicates mounting with long axis horizontal.
3. Each interlock attachment Type K-3 must be specified attwo adjacent locations. Type KR-11 or Type KR-12 must bespecified at two adjacent locations. Type KRD Time DelayUnits require space equal to two push button mountingholes. The unused hole must be covered with at Type K-51or K-52 Closing Plate. The time delay unit must be posi-tioned with the contacts adjacent to the unused hole. Theunused hole may be located above, below, right or left of theunit.
4. Types KN-3 and KN-4 legend plates will not fit upright on 2,3 or 4 unit Type KY or Type KZ enclosures with long axis ver-tical. Type KYC enclosures must use Type KN-8 legendplates.
5. Large (2 1/4” Dia.) mushroom button operators can not bemounted in adjacent locations.
6. Enclosures have sufficient depth to accommodate two con-tact blocks side-by-side on illuminated operators (Types K,SK and T only).
Location of Control Units – Types K, KX, SK and T
KY-160KYAF-1600KYSS-1600KZ-160SKY-1600
KYAF-2000KYSS-2000SKY-2000
KYAF-2500KYSS-2500SKY-2500
KYSS-3000
KY-10KYAF-100KYSS-100KZ-110SKY-100
KY-20KYAF-200KYSS-200KZ-210SKY-200
KY-30KYAF-300KYSS-300KZ-310SKY-300
KY-40KYAF-400KYSS-410KZ-410
SKY-400
KY-60KYAF-600KYSS-600KZ-60SKY-600
KY-90KYAF-900KYSS-900KZ-90SKY-900
KY-120KYAF-1200KYSS-1200KZ-120SKY-1200
Suffix No. (Add to
Operator Type No.)
Positions Total Circuits
Circuit Symbol
1 2 3 4
H1 KA-1 1 N.O.1 N.C.
H2 KA-1 KA-1 2 N.O.2 N.C.
H3 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 3 N.O.3 N.C.
H4 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 4 N.O.4 N.C.
H5 KA-2 1 N.O.
H6 KA-3 1 N.C.
H7 KA-2 KA-2 2 N.O.
H8 KA-3 KA-3 2 N.C.
H9 KA-4 KA-11 N.O.
1 E.C.N.O.2 N.C.
H10 KA-4 KA-51 E.C.N.O.1 E.C.N.C.
1 N.C.
H11 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 3 N.O.3 N.C.
H12 KA-2 KA-3 KA-2 KA-3 2 N.O.2 N.C.
H13 KA-1 1 N.O.1 N.C.
H14 KA-3 1 N.C.
H36 KA-2 1 N.O.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types KY and KZC — Security Control StationsApplication Data, Features
Standard Features• All cylinders are random keyed.• Key operators are all spring return from both sides to cen-
ter, maintained contact not available.• Key withdrawal is in the center position only.• Cover is mechanically interlocked with the box to make it
difficult for unauthorized people to gain entrance into theenclosure.
• Cover is securely held in place by allen screws.• Cylinders are of builders hardware type, which permits key-
ing stations to the rest of the cylinders in a development.• Cylinder legend plate marking is “OPEN-CLOSE.”• An optional push button is available. The legend plate mark-
ing is “STOP.”
Meets NEMA Type 3R requirements. When Best Lock stations are supplied with core, customer should contact local Best Lock
representative to change core. When Best Lock stations are supplied without core, customer must purchase core separate-
ly from Best Lock Company, and customer can subsequently change core at his conve-nience.
Contact Your Local Square D Sales Office If:• Master keying is required.• Keying several stations alike is required.• Station is to be keyed to a specific key number.• Nonstandard legend plates are required.• Extra keys are required.• A specific type of keyway is required.
Repair PartsReplacement or duplicate keys: Emhart, Yale, or Schlage - localdistributor, hardware store, or lock shop that duplicates keys.Square D can supply and deliver in 5 weeks. BEST – Must pur-chase from local Best Lock Corporation representative. Sargent –must purchase from Square D. Keys supplied with our securitycontrol station are registered to the Square D Company.
Description Type ofCylinder
CylinderFinish Special Features
CastAluminum
Enclosure
SatinChrome Finish
Flush Mtd.W/Box
Type Type
KeyOperator
Only
EmhartYaleBest
Best
Best
Best
Schlage
Sargent
ChromeBrass
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Complete With Core (6 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (6 Tumbler Pins)Complete With Core (7 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (7 Tumbler Pins)
Maximum Security Cylinder
KY198KY199KY197
KY196
KY195
KY194
KY193
KY192
KZC198KZC199KZC197
KZC196
KZC195
KZC194
KZC193
KZC192
KeyOperator
WithStop
Button
EmhartYaleBest
Best
Best
Best
Schlage
Sargent
ChromeBrass
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Complete With Core (6 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (6 Tumbler Pins)Complete With Core (7 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (7 Tumbler Pins)
Maximum Security Cylinder
KY298KY299KY297
KY296
KY295
KY294
KY293
KY292
KZC298KZC299KZC297
KZC296
KZC295
KZC294
KZC293
KZC292
Electrical RatingsKey Operator: One Class 9007 Type AO2 snap switch is used forthe “OPEN” position and one snap switch is used for the “CLOSE”position. See page 151 for electrical ratings of the 9007 AO2.
Stop Button: One Class 9001 Type KA1 contact block is used on theoptional push button. See page 151 for 9001KA1 electrical ratings.(Note: The KA1 contact block has a maximum voltage rating of300 volts (NEMA A300) when used in the Type KZC station.)
Dimensions
Replacement enclosures are not sold. Replacement cores orcylinders are not sold.
3
3
3
Mtg
Mtg
Mtg
Mtg
8
8
88 16
16
4
8
28
1
5
55 5
5
3
5
17
4 2
3
45
B30064-682
Surface Mount Type KY
Dia. Mtg. Holes
Conduit TopDim.Inside
32133
811
327(4)
-1443
2169
3
1"K.O. forTop, Bottom and Back
Conduit
Wall Surface
B30064-683
33
3
1632
1616
32
32 32
4
4
2
2
8 4Mtg.Mtg.
Mtg.
Mtg.
1616
1616
16
16
2 416
16
161313
77
MinAdjustmentPlasterMax
04
4
19
19 27
3
3
1
1
3 199
1"
11
1
1
7
2
2
6 857
22
2
2
1"
(14 )1/4 Dia. Mtg. Holes
1 37
11
3
932
Flush Mount Type KZC
UL ListedFile E42259CNN NKCR
CSA ListedFile LR25490Class 321103
Type KY192
Type KZC299
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are FINGERSAFE®
contact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminalscrews. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the wipingaction of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will accept up to2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA31, KA3, and KA33 N.C. contacts are direct opening.
For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K or SKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For sequencing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.
Standard Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
(Clear Cover)
KA1
(Green Cover)
KA2
(Red Cover)
KA3
(Clear Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA4
(Red Cover)
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA5
(Green Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA6
Additional Circuit Arrangements Available
Sequencing N.O. Contact of KA4 closes before N.O. Contact on KA1 KA4 KA1
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA1
Overlapping N.O. Contact of KA4 closes before N.C. Contact
of KA5 Opens KA4 KA5
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA5
Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts – Class 9001 Type KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
Volts
AC
Volts
DC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600) 35% Power Factor Resistive 75% Power Factor Make, Break and Continuous Amperes
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type A600)
Make Break ContinuousCarrying Amperes
Make and Break ContinuousCarrying AmperesAmperes VA Amperes VA KA1 KA2, KA3 KA4 KA5, KA6
120240480600
60301512
7200720072007200
6.03.01.51.2
720720720720
10101010
10101010
125250600
1.10.550.2
1.10.550.2
1.1..........
1.10.550.2
101010
Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts – Class 9007 Type AO2
SwitchType
Contact Action
Direct Opening Contacts to Meet IEC 947-5-1
Requirements for Positive Opening Contacts
AC – 50 or 60 Hz DCAC or DC
Volts
Inductive 35% Power Factor Resistive 75% Power Factor
Volts
Inductive and Resistive
Make Break Make and BreakAmperes
Make and Break Amperes ContinuousCarrying AmperesAmps VA Amps VA Single Throw Double Throw
AO-2 SPDT No
120240480600
4020108
4800480048004800
151065
1800240028803000
151065
125250600. . . .
2.00.50.1. . . .
0.50.20.02. . . .
15151515
Minimum order quantity is 25.
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks, But Provide:• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue connectors• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep vs. 0.97" deep
on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89. • Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Con-tact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.
Symbol
Contact Blocks With Binder Head Screws (not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks)
Gold Flashed Contacts With Standard Pressure Wire Terminals
Type Quantity Type
KA21 25-Up KA31
KA22 25-Up KA32
KA23 25-Up KA33
N.O. EarlyClosing
KA24 25-Up KA34
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA25 25-Up KA35
Symbol Type Symbol Type
KA1G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA4G
KA2GN.C. Contact Late Opening
KA5G
KA3G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA6G
Symbol Type
KA12
KA13
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmReed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information
In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explosion-proofequipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control stations. Knowing whattype of hazardous location exists will permit you to select the most eco-nomical solution to your application. If you're not sure what type of haz-ardous location exists, the “Summary of Classification” chart may help.If not, contact your local electrical inspector. When you know whatclass, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in the lower lefthandcorner of this page for what Square D has to offer.
① An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or anintrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardousarea to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system,any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can beused. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light,may be used.
➁ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Divi-sion 2 hazardous locations.1. Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.2. All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2
areas. 3. Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules
other than the transformer type. 4. The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.
➂ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.
For : Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.
Summary Of Classification Chart
Class Division Group
I. Gas 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
B. Location adjacent to Division 1 location.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases Containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
II. Dust 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
E. Conductive and Combustible Dust (Resistivity <105 ohms/cm)
F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity >102 ohm/cm but ≤ 108ohm/cm)
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
III. Fibers1. Production Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
2. Handling and Storage Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
ForUse
Class Division Group(s)
I 1 A 1. Intrinsically Safe System ①
I 1 B, C, D 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System ①
I 2 A1.
2.
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
I 2 B, C, D
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
II 1 E, F, G 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System ①
II 2 E, F
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
II 2 G
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①
III 1, 2 –
1.2.
3.
9001 BR Station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①
All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire.
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operatoris the same for standard contact blocks, except:• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M”
mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (ei-
ther side), maximum 2 in tandem.• On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blocks
on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters throughNEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.
➃ Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor.➄ Inductive and Resistive Ratings.
Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact BlocksSuitable for use on low energy level circuits
Description Symbol Type
KA41
KA42
KA43
KA44
KA45
Max. Volts AC/DCMaximum Load
Res. Ind. Cont.32/30
120/1000.25 A 8 VA
0.10 A3 VA
0.5 A0.5 A
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
KA51
KA52
KA53
KA54
KA55
Volts
AC NEMA Type C300 ➃Make Break Continuous
Carrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
120240
10.005.00
12001200
1.0000.500
120120
3.03.0
Volts
DC NEMA Type Q150 ➄Make Break Continuous
Carrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
115 0.50 58 0.50 58 3.0
Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits — NEMA Type 4XIntrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal en-
ergy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous at-mosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.
Listed below are pilot lights that are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2. These pilot lights are Factory Mutual FM# J.I. OH4A2,AX,3610 (FM ap-proved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.
These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates.
The XDP exterior, heavy duty monolever was designed for aircraft unloading equipment, where exposure to severe environments and mechanical abuse are inevitable. These switches have been engineered to withstand adverse conditions such as smog, dust, high humidity and extreme temperatures experienced in an airport environment. The XDP is currently being used for aircraft unloading service in Alaska. Other applications include snow plow controls and cherry pickers.
4 Types of hand operations are offered:
A 2-position monolever operator that operates 2 contacts*, one contact per direction. The operator is spring returned to the center position (momentary).
A 2-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*. This is a “Z” cam operation; the lever is spring returned to the center position (momentary). The first contact actuates with 15
°
operator movement; the second contact actuates with an additional 90
°
movement of the operator while still in the 15
°
position. Both contacts are actuated with the second movement.
A 4-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*, one contact per direction. The operator is spring returned to the center position (momentary).
An 8-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*. Movement to the north, south, east, or west positions activates a single contact. Movement to the NE, NW, SE, or SW activates two contacts. The lever is spring returned to the center position (momentary).
* Contacts on monolevers with Telemecanique blocks are stackable with up to 3 contacts in any position.
Specifications
Electrical ratings 10 A resistive/inductive up to 15 Vdc ZB2 contacts NEMA A600, Q600
Mechanical/electrical life In excess of 1 million actuations per direction at rated load
Enclosure
NEMA Type 4 (IP65) when installed in a suitable enclosure.Exposed components:• Unaffected by oil or grease• Ozone resistant• Does not age or crack with prolonged outdoor exposure
Mechanism
• Lever operated• Momentary action (spring return to center)• Panel mounted• Anti-rotational, mounts with 4 screws (not provided)• Mounting nuts remove from the rear, rounded bolt heads exposed on operator side• Withstands severe operator abuse
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Monolever switches with 1 NO ZB2 contact block (ZB2BE101) in each position (up to 3 stackable in any position). NC contacts available, consult factory.
Monolever switches with micro-switch V3 contacts (NO/NC).
Description Function Catalog Number
2 positions2 contacts XDPA1010C1
2/4 positions4 contacts XDPB1111C1
4 positions4 contacts XDPC1411C1
8 positions8 contacts XDPD1111C1
Description Function Catalog Number
2 positions2 contacts XDPA5050C4
2/4 positions4 contacts XDPB5555C4
4 positions4 contacts XDPC5555C4
8 positions8 contacts XDPD5555C4
2.5665
1.7544
Square
.0621.6
4.44113
NeopreneGasket
XDP****C1, C2, C3, C6, P1, P3Monolever with “ZB2” type contact
2.5665
2.0652
0.3910
Square
.0621.6
4.44113
NeopreneGasket
3/16" Quick ConnectTab Terminals
Tolerance = ±0.06 in (1.5mm)
XDP****C4Monolever with V3 switches
File LR 44087Class 3211 03
File E164353CCN NKCR2
®
File E164353CCN NKCR
File LR 44087Class 3211 03
Dual Dimensions:Millimeters
Inches
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
The Class 9001 Type BW Pendant Station is a pre-assembled,2 button station well suited for standard hoist applications.Oversized finger grips on the rear of the enclosure make iteasy to grip and operate.
Features and Options
• Made of high impact thermoplastic with self-extinguish-ing flammability rating (UL 94V)
• UL Listed and CSA Approved• 1/2" conduit opening• Internal strain relief post• Momentary contact• Maintained contact• Single speed• Two speed• With or without mechanical interlock• Optional external hanger bracket and seal• Ribs on top of enclosure prevent hanger bracket from
rotating and coming loose• Contoured for easy grip• Easy to hold with one hand
• Interchangeable legend inserts• Field installable mushroom button• Full cover gasket to exclude harmful contaminants
• Jumper included on all single speed buttons (except uni-versal types), saves wiring time
• Self-lifting pressure wire connectors for easy wiring
Off and Stop are WhiteLetters on a Red Background
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant StationsSpecifications
Screws not included. Order quantity 4 of a 21930-14281 for the screws.
For Dimensions ..................................................................................... Page 159
Hanger Bracket and Seal Kit
Type
B350
File E42259 File LR 25490
MarkingCCN NKCR Class 3211 03
Replacement Enclosures 9001BW70’S and 9001BW80’S
Description Yellow Red Black
Box 3110113201 3110113202 3110113203
Cover 3110114750 3110114751 3110114752
Mushroom Button (less button insert) –For NEMA Type 4X, BW70 and BW80
Color Type
Red B303
10
25 100
147146145150
Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 1
Speed 2
The Class 9001 BW70 and BW80 pendant stations are used for hoist applications, requiring either single speed or two speed but-tons. The thermoplastic enclosure is provided with a 1/2 inch conduit entrance at top to accept a pendant cable and has internal strain relief provided as standard. The stations are rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4 and 4X. The enclosure is available in three colors. All universal stations have double circuit blocks (1 N.O. — 1 N.C.) on each button and come without legends so they can be as-sembled to fit the application. For convenience, push buttons have interchangeable legend inserts. The complete line is UL listed and C.S.A. certified.
Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.
Addition of External hanger bracket (similar to the one used on Class 9001 Type SKYPPendant Stations). Use when polymeric cord connectors are required.
Interchangeable Push Button Legend Inserts
Marking
ForNEMA Type
4XType BW70’sand BW80’s
Mushroom Button
Inserts ForNEMA Type
4X Type BW70’s
and BW80’s
Marking
ForNEMA Type
4XType BW70’s and BW80’s
Mushroom Button
Inserts ForNEMA Type
4X Type BW70’s
and BW80's
Type Type Type Type
StartStopForwardReverseOpenCloseRaiseLowerUpDown
B259B260B255B256B263B264B261B262B253B254
B282B283B278B279B286B287B284B285B276B277
OnOff
HandAuto
Blank- BlackBlank- Red
B257B258B265B266
B251
B252
B280B281B288B289
B251
B252
Legend Insert Kit –
Kit includes one each of standard legend inserts as indicated below Type No. of kit.
Where Used: Type
For NEMA Type 4XType BW70’sand BW80
Push ButtonB250 (includes
1 each ofB253 through B266)
MushroomButton
B300 (includes1 each of
B276 through B289)
Hanger Bracket
Form
Y236
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2Material Pull Pendant Station
control bus and a single input push but-ton operator enclosed in a pendant station. Single-bit businterface circuitry is used in this unit. If multiplexed operation isused by the CPU interface card, the pendant is scanned everyframe. This pendant is not capable of being multiplexed (Seepage 9 for details).
Features
• Durable enclosure rated NEMA Type 12.• Bus powered lamp modules don’t require an auxiliary power
supply or additional power conductors.• Bus powered lamp modules use high visibility, low current
consumption LED lamps, providing long life and greater sys-tem flexibility.
• Mini-style quick-change connectors provide for easy pendantinstallation and change out.
• LED indicators provided on the SERIPLEX module showpower-on status, input status and output status – a conve-nient installation and troubleshooting aid.
About Material Pull Systems
A SERIPLEX Material Pull Pendant is used to control the floorstock of parts being installed during a final assembly operation.Typically, as an assembly worker uses parts they monitor thestock of material being used. When stock falls to a predeter-mined level, the assembly worker pushes the button on the Ma-terial Pull Pendant and a signal is sent to the computerrequesting parts for that specific assembly operation. The illu-minated push button in the pendant flashes to indicate the loca-tion where the parts are needed and a lift truck driver isdispatched with the parts. The lift truck driver presses the pen-dant push button to indicate that the parts have been deliveredand to reset the system.
Electrical Specifications
Voltage: 24 VdcCapacitance: 75 pF (typical)Max Current: 20 mA
Catalog Number
Input TypeAddress A
Input TypeAddress B
Output TypeAddress B Description
SPX BWPEND5
— N.O. LED Lamp - Amber
Pendant enclosure, single illumi-nated push button, bus powered amber LED lamp, 5-pin mini-style
quick change connector
9001AEQ3370
— N.O. LED Indica-tor - Red
Pendant enclosure, single non-illuminated push button, red LED indicating lamp inserted in bottom of pendant, 5-pin mini-style quick
change connector
Pin 5Data Line
Pin 4Clock Line
Pin 1Shield Drain
Pin 2V+ DC
Bus Power
Pin 3 Extended Pin Bus Common
Male Receptacle Pin-out
Dimensions (SPXBWPEND5 only)
Replacement Parts
Internal Wiring to SERIPLEX Module
For additional information, see catalog 8330CT9601R11/96.
Part Number Description
SPXLEDA1
LED Lamp - Amber
9001B350
BW Pendant Hanger Bracket
9001A31
Push button Lens - Amber
SPXHH2P2CABLE
Hand-Held Set-Up Tool Adapter Cable for 5-Pin Mini-style Connectors
4.65(118)
3.12(79.2)
4.10(104)
2.20(55.9)
5.50(140)
Pendant connector receptacle: Torque nut to 23 - 27 lb-in. Pendant enclosure screws: Torque screws to 15 lb-in.Operator ring nut: Torque 6 - 8 lb-ft.
Note: Gasket must be in place to maintain enclosure rating.
in.(mm)
Module LED Indicators
Input address B (N.O.)
O PB IB
white (data)
blue (clock)
red (V+)
black (common)
orange (shield drain)
LED Color Function and Address
I
B
yellow Input B Active
P green Bus Power Applied
O
B
yellow Output B Active
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XAC pendant stations are designed for standard or medium duty control circuit applications. The en-closures are made from rugged, double insulated thermoplastic material. These stations have beendesigned for easy handling and operation, even with heavy work gloves.
Two styles of stations are offered; “small hoist” pistol grip stations with integral parts (see page 163),and "general purpose" station components with modular assembly required. The general purpose com-ponents are available as custom factory assembled stations. For custom applications, a wide range ofoperators, contact blocks, legend plates and accessories are offered.
Features Applications
•
1 and 2 speed versions
•
Overhead cranes
•
Double insulated
•
Tower cranes
•
Shock and corrosion resistant
•
Fixed hoists
•
2, 4, 6, 8, 12 element versions
•
Beam hoists
•
Ease of operation
Specifications
Electrical ratings NEMA A600, Q600
Enclosure XACAO* NEMA Type 4, 4X (Indoor/Outdoor), 5IP 65
XACAO* (Pistol grip) NEMA Type 4, 4X (Indoor), 5IP 65
Operating temperatures -15
°
C to +70
°
C-5
°
F to +158
°
F
Housing Yellow polypropylene
Storage temperatures -40
°
C to +70
°
C-40
°
F to +158
°
F
Shock resistance 100 g
Vibration resistance 15 g for f = 40 to 500 Hz
Mechanical life
1 million operations(The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product, please refer to Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.)
Operating force
XACA Multi-element types-with contact ZB2BE:1 daN (36 oz.) for 1N.O.,1.3 daN (46.8 oz.) for 1N.O./1N.C.-with contact XENG1491:1.4 daN (50.4 oz.) for 1N.C./2N.O.-with contact XENG1191:1.4 daN (50.4 oz.) for 1st step,2.5 daN (89.9 oz.) for 2nd step
Cable entry XACD - 7 to 18 mmAll other models - 8 to 26 mm
CablingScrew and captive cable clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 in lbs. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5 mm
2
(20 AWG) solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm
2
(16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm
2
(14 AWG) or by cable quick connector conforming to NF C 20- 20 (on request).
Approvals
File E164353CCN NKCR
File LR 44087Class 3211 03
Marking
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
These XACD units are available with factory installed E-stops. Add a “3” to the end of the catalog number for standard E-stop or add a “4” for a “Trigger Action” E-stop.
t
Standard enclosures include internal mounting plate, cable sleeve for 8 to 26 mm, internal cable clamp, suspension ring and cable tie.
j
Cannot be used with
XACA03
pendant.
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Pistol grip stations
Description Speeds Function1 Speed / 2 Speed Catalog Number
1 N.O. contact per operator2 Mechanically interlocked operators 1 XACA201
All nameplates are black w/white lettering except “Stop”, “Emergency Stop” and “Reset” which are red w/white lettering.For black “Reset” change final digit of catalog number to 2.
j
Please specify lettering when ordering. Two lines with 11 characters (including spaces) maximum on each line.
Green 6 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0063Red 6 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0064
Amber 6 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0065Green 12 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0123Red 12 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0124
Amber 12 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0125Green 24 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0243Red 24 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0244
Amber 24 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0245Green 120 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS1203Red 120 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS1204
Amber 120 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS1205
PVC Standard legend plates 30 x 40mm
Text
a
Catalog number Text
a
Catalog number
Bridge Forward ZB2BY2343 Off ZB2BY2312Bridge Reverse ZB2BY2344 On ZB2BY2311Close ZB2BY2314 Off On ZB2BY2367Down ZB2BY2308 Open ZB2BY2313Emergency Stop ZB2BY2330 Open Close ZB2BY2376Fast ZB2BY2328 Open-O-Close ZB2BY2388Forward ZB2BY2305 Out ZB2BY2339For Rev ZB2BY23 Power On ZB2BY2326For-O-Rev ZB2BY2384 Raise ZB2BY2335Hand Off Auto ZB2BY2387 Reset ZB2BY2323High ZB2BY2338 Reverse ZB2BY2306High Low ZB2BY2369 Right ZB2BY2309Hoist Down ZB2BY2342 Run ZB2BY2334Hoist Up ZB2BY2341 Slow ZB2BY2327In ZB2BY2503 Start ZB2BY2303Inch ZB2BY2321 Stop ZB2BY2304Jog For ZB2BY2381 Stop Start ZB2BY2366Jog Rev ZB2BY2380 Trolley Right ZB2BY2345Jog Run ZB2BY2365 Trolley Left ZB2BY2346Left ZB2BY2310 Up ZB2BY2307Low ZB2BY2336 Up Down ZB2BY2370Lower ZB2BY2337 Up-O-Down ZB2BY2389Man Auto ZB2BY2372
Type Description Catalog number
PVC blank legendBlank Black or red background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2101Blank Yellow or white background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4101
PVC custom engraved
Special engraving
j Black background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2002Special engravingj Red background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2004Special engravingj White background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4001Special engravingj Yellow background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4005
DL1CE0**(Incandescent)
DL1CJUS****(LED)
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XACA — Pendant Stations
XACA Order guide instructionsCustom built pendant stations
1. The first step in putting together your pendant station is to determine the number of operators that you require. This enables you to choose theenclosure based on the number of holes needed.
2. Select the type of operator, contact block and appropriate nameplate for each function required from pages 163-166. Enter the componentsfor each function on the order form below.
3. Check for special functions that may be required. These items could include mechanical interlocks, adapters for self-supporting cable, lowersupport rings, protective guards etc.
Photocopy this form and complete all information.
TO BE COMPLETED BY SQUARE D TO BE COMPLETED BY CUSTOMERName Branch/Sales office Firm Sheet No.
Date Order No. Delivery date Date Cust. Order No. Delivery date
No. ofidentical unitsrequired
Unit referenceof enclosure
XACA
Functions(optional)
Mechanicalinterlock(draw a linebetween the 2units to beinterlocked)
Legends Contact blocksand pilot light bodies
push buttonpilot light orblanking plug
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Mechanical interlock XACA009 Number of XAC A009 required
Unit mounted in base of station (facing downwards)
13
AttachmentsPosition Type Catalog No.
Cross theappropriatebox if required
14 Adapters for self supporting cable type BBAP(only available with 8 to 26 mm dia. cable sleeve) XACB961
15 Lower support ring XACA971
16 Protective guard for base mounted selector switchor 40 mm emergency stop push button XACA982
17 Protective guard for key switch XACA983
123456789101112
13
14
15
16
17
1 1
22
3 34 4
5 5
6 6
1
2
34
5
6
* Mechanical interlock
Possible combinations
Impossible combinations
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XACA — Pendant StationsDimensions
This line of pendant stations consists of polymeric enclosures(2 through 10 units), push button units (1 through 5 speed) andlaminated legend plates. All enclosures have an extra singleunit space near the top which permits the installation of a tog-gle switch ➀, a Type SK operator or pilot light ➁ or a warninglabel. All enclosures come with a stainless steel hanger brack-et and internal strain relief post, as standard. Enclosures areyellow and have a threaded opening in the top. The completeline is UL Listed and CSA Certified with NEMA Type environ-mental ratings 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13.
Class 9001 SK push-to-test pilot lights and remote test pilot lights will not fit in these enclo-sures.
Assembled pendant stations consist of an enclosure, operators and legend plates. Theprice of the total station consists of the prices of the individual components - there is nocharge for assembly. All custom orders must include the pendant key sheet available asshown on page 173.
Threaded conduit hole
Hanger bracket (Part no. 6509101801)
Space for toggle switch, a type SK operator or pilot light. Use appropriate legend plates.
Type SKYP enclosure
Type SKRU1 through SKRU11 operators. Any Type SK pilot light or operator can be mounted in this enclosure. The enclosure depth will accommodate 1 Type KA1 thru KA6 (total of 2) contact blocks.
Type SKN2 legend plate
Types SKRU 1, 10 and 11 use Type KA contact blocks. Types SKRU 2 thru 5 are factoryenclosed contact blocks.
Multispeed Contact Symbols (“X”= Contact Closed)
Enclosures
Size Conduit EntranceSize
Enclosure OnlyEnclosure For
Assembled Station
Type Type
2 Button4 Button6 Button8 Button
10 Button
3/4"-14 NPT3/4"-14 NPT1"-111/2 NPT
11/4"-111/2 NPT11/4"-111/2 NPT
SKYP2SKYP4SKYP6SKYP8SKYP10
SKYP20SKYP40SKYP60SKYP80SKYP100
Push Button UnitsNumber of
ButtonsPer Unit
DescriptionContact
Symbol –See Below
Type
2 Single Speed –Momentary Interlocked 7 SKRU1
2 Single Speed –Momentary Non-Interlocked 5 SKRU10
2 Single Speed –Maintained Interlock 10 SKRU11
2 Two Speed –Momentary Interlocked 87 SKRU2
2 Three Speed –Momentary Interlocked 88 SKRU3
2 Four Speed –Momentary Interlocked 89 SKRU4
2 Five Speed –Momentary Interlocked 90 SKRU5
Terminals
87
2868-D30
C
1
2
2 1
SPEED POSITIONOFF
1 2
C
1
2
Terminals
TerminalsC
1
2
3
4
4 3 2 1
SPEED POSITIONOFF
2868-D31
89
1 2 3 4Terminals
C
1
2
3
4
C
1
2
3
3 2 1
SPEED POSITIONOFF
2868-D29
88
1 2 3 Terminals
C
1
2
3
Terminals
TerminalsC
1
2
3
4
4 3 2 1
SPEED POSITIONOFF
2868-D32
90
1 2 3 4Terminals
C
1
2
3
4
5 5
55
➀ Can be supplied by Square D as Class 9001 Type SKSTS1- includes boot for NEMA Type 4X.
➁ See Class 9001 Type SK on page 171.➂ Includes legend plate, gasket and ground plate to be used with toggle switch.➃ Tri-laminated legend plate having a yellow or red background on a black core. ➄ 19 characters each side max.
Single Speed Contact Symbols
Dimensions ........................................................................................... Page 172Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Pendant ........................................... Page 173
(1) Red knob available with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob.See note (3) below for additional options.
(1) Red knob available with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob.See note (3) below for additional options.
Shallow Depth Light Modules For Type SK Control Units• UL listed and CSA certified• LED light modules use lamp with 7 element LED cluster that provides illumination similar to incandescent illumination.• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
➀ 9001 SK
(3) For additional Type SK push button operators (illuminated and non-illuminated), light modules, and contact blocks, see document 9001CT9601: 30mm Push Buttons Type K and SK. All illumi-nated push button operators must use a shallow depth light module listed above. Only standard pilot lights and non-illuminated selector switches can be used in Type SKYP enclosures.
Non-illuminated
Description Color Catalog
2 Position Red SKR9R
Maintained Pull Red (1) SKR9R05
Maintained Push (2) SKR9 (2)
Illuminated
Description Color Voltage Catalog
2 Position Red 120 Vac/dc - Full Voltage SKR9P58R
Maintained Pull Red (1) 24 Vac/dc - Full Voltage SKR9P55R05
Maintained Push (2) 24 Vac/dc - Full Voltage SKR9P55 (2)
Type SKYPClass 9001 Type SK Push-To-Test Pilot Lights and Remote TestPilot Lights will not fit in these enclosures.Standard Pilot Lights will fit in these enclosures. For illuminatedoperators, in the SKYP, the shallow depth light module(9001KM55 or 9001KM58) must be used.
Units
“A” Dimensions Conduit Opening
Inches mm NPT
2 11.70 297 3/4” -14
4 16.03 407 3/4” -14
6 20.36 517 1” -11 1/2
8 24.69 627 11/4” -111/2
10 29.02 737 11/4” -111/2
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations
3. Legend Plate Marking – Used Only if Special Marking is RequiredExample:
Line 2 - SKN299Line 3 - A.) Hoist
B.) FWD C.) REV
ENCLOSURES – NEMA 4X, 13
PUSH BUTTON UNITS – NEMA 4X, 13
CLOSING PLATE
Control Products KEY SHEET FOR ORDERING CLASS 9001 TYPE SKYPASSEMBLED PENDANT CONTROL STATIONS
CUSTOMER CUSTOMER ORDER NO.
Class 9001 Type SKYP -________DATE LIST PRICE EACH, DIB QUANTITY
SizeConduitEntrance
Size
Enclosurefor Assembled
Station
Type
2 Button 3/4” -14 NPT SKYP20
4 Button 3/4” -14 NPT SKYP40
6 Button 1” -14 NPT SKYP60
8 Button 11/4” -11 1/2 SKYP80
10 Button 11/4” -11 1/2 SKYP100
Assembled pendant stations consist of an enclosure, operators, and legendplates. The price of the total station consists of the prices of the individualcomponents – there is no charge for assembly.
Number of Buttons per
UnitDescription Contact
Symbol Type
2 Single Speed - Momentary Interlocked 7 SKRU1
2 Single Speed - Momentary Non-Interlocked 5 SKRU10
2 Single Speed - Maintained Interlocked 10 SKRU11
2 Two Speed - Momentary Interlocked 87 SKRU2
2 Three Speed - Momentary Interlocked 88 SKRU3
2 Four Speed - Momentary Interlocked 89 SKRU4
2 Five Speed - Momentary Interlocked 90 SKRU5
Type
SK52
A
1
C
B 23
SKRU1SKN201
123
SKRU1SKN201
Hanger bracketThreaded conduitholeSpace for toggleswitch ➀, a Type SKoperator or pilot lightor a warning label.Use SKN5 or SKN1legend plates.
Type SKYP enclosure
Type SKRU1 throughSKRU11 operators.Type SKN2 legendplate
LEGEND PLATES – NEMA 4X, 13
➀ Can be supplied by Square D as 9001SKSTS1➁ Includes legend plate, gasket and ground plate to be
used with toggle switch.➂ Tri-laminated legend plate having a yellow or red
background on a black core.➃ 19 characters each sides. Class 9001 Type SK Push-To-Test Pilot lights and Re-
mote Test Pilot lights will not fit in these enclosures.
The XVA indicating bank is an illuminatedstackable modular system of signaling lightsthat can be used for indicating the status of amachine and verifying that status from a dis-tance and in all directions (360
°
). The modularsystem of lenses allows the unit to be construct-ed from any combination of 1 to 5 lenses. Con-stant, flashing and strobe units are available.
Examples: Indicates machine shutdown, short-age of materials, paging of supervisor or main-tenance personnel, hazardous or dangerousconditions to name a few. It is a perfect solutionfor status indication on factory floors utilizingJIT methods.
Machines, instrument panels and work stationsequipped with the XVA allow personnel to reactmore quickly to any situation or incident.
Some industries that currently use or could use XVAs:
How to choose between the standard incandescent bulband the LED cluster lamp
Average P.O. costs
$25 - $50
to process; assume bulbs ordered twice each year.
Assume maintenance worker rate of approximately
$20
/hr. or
$5
/15 minutes to changebulb.
LED Lamp & Lens Assemblies
Yellow lamps can be installed in either yellow or clear bases.
The flashing circuitry is in the LED lamp, not the lens.
Yellow lamp installed in a yellow lens. Order components XVAC381 (for indicating banksand beacons) with XVAD381B120 (steady light) or XVAD481B120 yellow (flashing) LED lamp. Lead time based on components.
Yellow installed in a clear lens (both items are in stock).
Yellow lamps can be installed in either yellow or clear bases.
The flashing circuitry is in the LED lamp, not the lens.
Yellow lamp installed in a yellow lens. Order components XVAC381 (for indicating banksand beacons) with XVAD381C024 (steady light) or XVAD481C024 yellow (flashing) LED lamp. Lead time based on components.
Yellow installed in a clear lens (both items are in stock).
Use standard incandescent bulb when desiring: Use upgraded LED cluster lamp when desiring:
average operating life
≤
2,000 hours
a universal bulb
–
each bulb can be used with any color lens
–
Bipolar (e.g. 120 V bulb can be used with either 120 Vac or 120 Vdc)
low initial bulb cost for short term cost savings
bulb is normally OFF
extended lamp life (industry average for an LED is approx. 100,000 hrs.) - lamp is normally ON
resistance to vibration (e.g. direct machine mounting, conveyor mount, etc.)
to avoid machine and/or process downtime due to changing lamp, or if process is complicated to reset
lower power consumption
long range cost savings (see table below)
Product Cost Comparison
Lamp Type Average Life(approximate) Miscellaneous Illumination Cost Savings (over 11 years)
Incandescent ~ 2,000 hours
+ Low initial cost+ Many color options+ AC or DC power- Generates heat- Prone to shock and vibrationdamage
• Maximum brightness
$5 List Price/bulb x 50 ($30 cost/P.O.) (2 P.O.'s/yr.) (11yr.) ($5/bulb change) (50 bulb changes)
This price does not include cost of ma-chine or process downtime.
= 250.00= 660.00= 250.00—————
$ 1,160.00
LED
~ 100,000 hours (11.4 years)
“LED Industry Average”(~50 times life of incandescent)
+ Extremely long life+ Resistant to shock/vibration+ Cool operation+ Low power consumption
LED ColorBrightest Red
OrangeYellowGreen
Least bright Blue
$150 List Price/LED lamp x 1 ($30 cost/P.O.) (1 P.O.) ($5/lamp change) (1 lamp installation)
This price does not include savings from reduced power consumption.
= 150.00= 30.00= 5.00—————
$ 185.00
Color Steady Unit LED Catalog Numbers Flashing Unit LED Catalog Numbers
(Lamp/Lens) Voltage Indicating Banks and Beacons Indicating Banks and Beacons
Green/Green
120 VAC
XVACD331B120 XVACD431B120
Red/Red XVACD341B120 XVACD441B120
Orange/Orange XVACD351B120 XVACD451B120
Yellow/Yellow XVACD381B120 XVACD481B120
Yellow/Clear XVACD371B120 XVACD471B120
Color Steady Unit LED Catalog Numbers Flashing Unit LED Catalog Numbers
(Lamp/Lens) Voltage Indicating Banks and Beacons Indicating Banks and Beacons
Green/Green
24 VAC/DC
XVACD331C024 XVACD431C024
Red/Red XVACD341C024 XVACD441C024
Orange/Orange XVACD351C024 XVACD451C024
Yellow/Yellow XVACD381C024 XVACD481C024
Yellow/Clear XVACD371C024 XVACD471C024
NEW LAMP/LENSCOMBINATION
FREE LENS!
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XVA — Indicating Banks and BeaconsLED Cluster Lamps
These LEDs will not fit in XVA flashing lenses (i.e. XVAC4••) nor in steady lenses manufactured with date codes before 9221 (21st week of1992 Example of date code before this date would be 9210, 9138, etc.). LEDs will fit into lenses with a two letter date code, e.g. MA, CB, etc.
The flashing circuitry is in the LED, not the lens. *Yellow lens is not UL listed. Note: The LEDs have a separate negotiation category from the standard XVA Line.
Product CapabilitiesOur new XVA LED Cluster Lamp has passed (and even surpassed) exhaustive testing to en-sure the highest level of quality. The following are a few of those tests:
Reliability — predicted minimum mean time between failure (MTBF) of 200,000 hours.
Vibration Resistant — passed the following standard tests: IEC68-2-6: Cycling from 10 Hzto 55 Hz for 5 minutes, and holding at resonance on 55 Hz for 30 minutes.
Low Power Consumption — Approximately 40% less power dissipation than the incandes-cent lamp.
Current Regulated — Illumination will not vary in intensity from 85% to 120% of rated volt-age.
Leakage Current — Device will not illuminate with leakage current up to 3 mA.
UL Recognized, CSA Certified, with CE Marking
Noise Immunity — Meets requirements of IEC801. Passed the following standard tests:
IEC801-2: Electro-static discharge
IEC801-4: Fast transient burst
IEC801-5: Line-to-line surge withstand
IEC801-5: Line-to-ground surge withstand
Shock Resistant — Passed the following standard test: IEC68-2-27 (30 g, for 11 ms, 1/2 sinewave).
Shipping Test — Passed National Safe Transit Committee Project 1A Test
Thermal Cycling Test — Passed 35 cycles from -25 °C to 75 °C (one cycle = -25 °C to +75 °C to -25 °C in 1 hr.)
Salt Spray Test — Passed (96 hours). Test = 96 hours of direct spray.
Immune to interference from portable communication devices.
Storage Temperature -40 °C to + 70 °C (-40 °F to + 158 °F)
Operating Temperature -25 °C to + 55 °C (-13 °F to + 158 °F)
Color Steady Unit Flashing Unit
(Recommended Lens Color) Voltage Current LED Catalog No. Current LED Catalog No.
Red 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD341B120 25 mA XVAD441B120
(Red) 24 V AC/DC
AC: 80 mADC: 95 mA XVAD341C024 AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA XVAD441C024
Orange 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD351B120 25 mA XVAD451B120
(Orange) 24 VAC/DC
AC: 80 mADC: 95 mA XVAD351C024 AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA XVAD451C024
Green 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD331B120 25 mA XVAD431B120
(Green) 24 VAC/DC
AC: 80 mADC: 95 mA XVAD331C024 AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA XVAD4312C024
Yellow 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD381B120 25 mA XVAD481B120
(Yellow or Clear) 24 VAC/DC
AC: 80 mADC: 95 mA XVAD381C024 AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA XVAD481C024
File LR 44087Class 3211 03
File E164353CCN NKCR2
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons
The Class 9003 Type K2 rotary cam switch is a versatile means of providing inexpensive logic control. The Class 9003 Type K cam switch is available with:• Up to 12 switching positions • Worldwide acceptance • Attractive operator/handle appearance• Up to 20 contacts • Standard or custom configured sequencesA complete rotary cam switch consists of up to four items. This includes the contact block assembly, the operator/handle, a legend (if desired), and anyspecial accessories (if required).A. There are two ways of ordering a Class 9003 Type K rotary cam switch contact block assembly.1. If the desired contact sequence can be found on pages 185 through 189, order the class and type of the device.2. If the contact sequence cannot be found on pages 185 through 189, use the keysheet on pages 193 through 195. Indicate the exact contact config-
uration desired.
Devices will be assembled at the factory per this keysheet.
B. Operators/handles are listed on pages 190 and 191. The operator/handle is chosen depending on the application and size of the rotary cam switch.C. Many operators/handles come standard with a blank legend plate. Separate legends for operators without blank legend plates or when an additional
legend is desired are listed on page 192. Page 194 contains a chart on the maximum characters allowed on all legend plates.D. All accessories are listed on page 192.
Example
– Below is an explanation of the Contact Sequence/Wiring Diagrams found on pages 185 through 189.
1. Vertical arrow indicates contact status at 0
°
(up) handle position.2. Terminal identification, terminals 1 and 2 are one contact.3. Contact 3-4 is closed between 2nd and 4th position. The “H” indicates
that the contact does not open while switching from one position toanother.
4. Contacts 5-6 and 7-8 overlap between positions 4 and 5.5. Jumpers installed by factory between terminals 2 and 4, 6 and 12, 8
and 10.6. Horizontal arrow indicates spring return to
previous position
.7. Contact 1-2 is open in third position.8. Contact 1-2 is closed in second position.9. A “1” in adjacent boxes does not assure that the contact remains
closed while switching between adjacent positions.10. Contact 11-12 closes momentarily when switching from position 3 to
position 4. This contact is not closed at position 3 or at position 4.
Contact Ratings
The following contact rating charts are to be used in properly sizing a Class 9003 Type K rotary cam switch to a particular application. The UL ratings chartbelow reflects the ratings to UL specifications. The UL file is E164864. The Class 9003 Type K2 is UL Listed per guide NLRV. The Class 9003 Type K3through KA9 are UL component recognized per guide NLRV2. The lower chart is contact ratings per German specification VDE 0660. The CSA file isLR 44087, Class 3211 03 or Class 3211 05.
c
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.
UL Ratings
Contact Block Assembly
MaximumV
General Purpose
A
Horsepower 1 PH - 2 pole 60 Hz Horsepower 3 PH - 3 pole 60 Hz110V-120V
200V-208V
220V-240V
440V-480V
550V-600V
110V-120V
200V-208V
220V-240V
440V-480V
550V-600V
HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HPK2 300 12 0.5 1 1 – – 1.5 2 3 – – X XK3 120 20 0.75 – – – – 2 – – – – XK4 600 25 2 3 3 7.5 7.5 3 5 7.5 15 20 X XK5 600 32 2 3 5 10 15 5 7.5 10 20 25 X XK6 600 45 – – – – – 7.5 15 15 30 40 X XK7 600 63 – – – – – 10 15 20 40 50 X XK8 600 110 – – – – – 15 25 25 60 60 XK9 600 195 – – – – – 15 30 30 75 75 X
Electrical Ratings (VDE 0660)
Con-tact
Block
ShaftDi-
men-sions
Rated Cur-rentas
LoadBreakSwitch
I
a
ContinuousCurrent I
th2
InFreeAir
Utiliza-tion
Cate-gory
AC1 I
e
Utilization CategoryAC1
RatedOperational Current I
e
Utilization CategoryAC2 and AC3
Rated OperationCurrent I
e
Operational VoltagesUtilizationCategory AC11
Utilization CategoryAC3 and AC3 1 PH
InFreeAIr
En-closed
3 PH 3 Pole 1 PH 2 Pole 3 PH 3 Pole 1 PH 2
Pole For Y
q
-Starters
240 V 415 V 500 V
RatedInsu-lationVolt-age
MainSwitches
Emer-gencyStop
Switch
Emer-gencyMain
Switch220 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V 220 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V 220V 415 V 500 V 660 V
c
mm A A A A kW kW kW kW kW kW kWA
kWA
kWA
kWA kW kW kW kW kW kW A A A V V V V
K2 6 20 20 16 16 6 10.5 14 14 4.5 7.5 2.28.5
48.5
46.5
45 1.3 2.2 2.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4 3 2 660 500 660 500
K3 6 32 32 25 32 12 21 27.5 27.5 7 12 4.315
7.515.5
7.512
7.59 2.5 4.3 6.5 11 11 11 6 4 3 660 500 660 500
K4 8 63 63 50 40 15 26 34 34 14 24 5.520.5
1122
1122
1113 – – 8.5 15 15 15 12 8 6 660 500 660 500
K5 8 63 63 50 40 15 26 34 34 14 24 8.529
1530
1523
1517.5 – – 12.5 22 22 22 – – – 660 500 660 500
K6 8 80 80 63 63 24 41.5 54 54 17.5 30 1139
2040
2030.5
2023 – – 17 30 30 30 – – – 660 500 660 500
K7 8 100 100 80 80 30 52.5 69 69 22 38 1759
3057
3044
3033 – – 26 45 45 45 – – – 660 660 660 660
K8 8 160 160 125 125 48 83 108 108 35 61 2481.5
4585
4565
4549 – – 32 55 55 55 – – – 660 660 660 660
K9 8 250 250 200 200 75 130 170 170 55 95 34115
60114
6085
6065 – – – – – – – – – 660 660 660 660
Only an example! – Contact your local Square D Sales Office for conditions on Spring Return and Jumper options and pricing.
1
7
2
8
11 129 10
5 63 4
1 6
2 25
5
5
8
3
4
4
9
10
7
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003 Type K instrument switches are a specialized form of a control circuit rotary cam switch. These switches have the proper contact sequencesand jumpers to provide measurement of either voltage or amperage of more than one source on one meter.
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
Description Type
Suggested Operatorand Legend Marking.
See pages 190 –191, 195for other operators.
Wiring Diagram Contact Sequence
VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase toneutral voltageswith off position
K2D023M KBF1C 4-13
VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase to phasevoltageswith off position
K2D024M KBF1C 4-10
K2D1049M KBF1C 4-534
K4D1049M KBF2F4-534
VOLTMETERFor reading1 phase to neutraland 3 phase tophase voltageswith off position
K2E025M KBF1C 4-11
VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase to phasevoltages of twodifferent supplieswith off position
K2H026M KBF1C 4-12
VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase to phaseand 3 phase toneutral voltagesof one supplywith off position
K2F1050MKBF1C 4-14
orKBF1C 4-535
K4F1050M KBF2F4-535
AMMETERFor reading theamperage on threelines using 2 CT'swith off position
Class 9003 Type K instrument switches are a specialized form of a control circuit rotary cam switch. These switches have the proper contact sequencesand jumpers to provide measurement of either voltage or amperage of more than one source on one meter.
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
Description Type
t
Suggested Operator and Legend Marking. See pages 190 –191, 195 for other operators. Wiring Diagram Contact Sequence
AMMETER/VOLTMETERReads 3 currenttransformers and3 phase to neutralvoltages. Withoutoff position.
K2K1014M KBF1C 9-14
AMMETER/VOLTMETERReads 3 currenttransformers and3 phase to phasevoltages. Withoutoff position.
Key withdrawal codes.When ordering a Key operator for a contact block assembly, the switching angle of the contact block assembly must first be known. From the chart at right, choose the appropriate suffix for the desired switching angle. This suffix is added to the end of the operator/handle's type number.
Example: 45
°
switching for 9003KAB1S KAB1S16
Note: Key is removable in all positions.Replacement Key is Class 9001Z18.
q
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.
The following operators/handles are for the Class 9003 Type K2 Rotary Cam Switches. These are single hole mounting, and are mounted in a 22mm (
7
/
8
inch) diameter mounting hole. All meet protection category IP-65.
Description Style
BlackBezelBlackKnob
ChromeBezelBlackKnob
YellowBezelRed
Knob
Dimensions
q
mm
Bezel – Small square similar to 9001D1 and D2 operators.
Does not includeblank legend plate.
Knob KAB1A KBB1A --
Key
t
KAB1S KBB1S --
Bezel – Small round similarto 9001D3 and D4 operators.
Does not includeblank legend plate.
Knob KAA1A KBA1A --
Key
t
KAA1S KBA1S --
Bezel – Large round.Does not include
blank legend plate.
Knob KAA2B KBA2B KCA2L
Key
t
KAA2S KBA2S --
Bezel – 45 x 45 mm.Includes blanklegend plate.
Knob KAC1B KBC1B KCC1L
Key
t
KAC1S KBC1S --
Bezel – 60 x 60 mm.Includes blanklegend plate.
Knob KAD1C KBD1C KCD1M
Key
t
KAD1S KBD1S --
The following operators/handles are for the Class 9003 Type K2 Rotary Cam Switches with 90˚ switching angle and only two positions.
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.
The following operators/handles are for 4 hole mounting of the Class 9003 Types K2 through K9 rotary cam switch. They are suitable for panel mounting or base mounting of contact block assemblies. See description below for proper sizing of operators/handles and contact block assemblies. These operators provide protection category IP-40. See page 192 for gaskets.
Description Black LegendBlack Knob
Chrome LegendBlack Knob
Yellow LegendRed Knob
Dimensionsmm
a
Mounting
Includes blankbezel legend
For size K2-K3Bezel 45 x 45 mm KAE1B KBE1B KCE1L
For size K2-K3Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF1C KBF1C KCF1M
For size K4-K6Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF2F KBF2F KCF2R
Includes blankbezel legend plate
For size K7-K9Bezel 90 x 90 mm
KAG2G KBG2G KCG2T
KAG2H KBG2H KCG2U
The following operators/handles are for 4 hole mounting of the Class 9003 Types K2 through K9 rotary cam switches with 90˚ switching angle and only two positions.
Description Black OperatorBlack Knob
Yellow OperatorRed Knob
Dimensionsmm
a
Mounting
For size K2-K3Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF1X KCF1Y
For size K4-K6Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF2X KCF2Y
For size K4-K9Bezel 90 x 90 mm
KAG2X KCG2Y
Marked 9-30 (see page 195) No other markings available.
1. Choose the chart below with the switching angle as determined on thekey sheet. This identifies the angular location and the position numbersfor the various positions of the rotary cam switch.
Zero degrees orstraight up is always position 1.
Use these position numbers whencompleting the target table on page 194.
2. Terminals on the cam switch have the same numbers as the terminalnumbers on the target table.
Contact 1-2 is a single contact.
3. WHEN INDICATING A CONTACT CLOSURE, PLACE “X” WITHINTHE SQUARE AS SHOWN IN THE CONTACT SEQUENCEEXAMPLE AT RIGHT.
Explanation Of Example Below
1. Contact 1-2 is open in all positions but position 2.2. Contact 3-4 is closed from the 2nd through the 4th position. The
contact does not open while switching from one position to another.3. Contacts 5-6 and 7-8 overlap between positions 2 and 3.4. Contact 9-10 is closed in positions 2 and 3. It is open momentarily
while switching between positions 2 and 3.5. Contact 11-12 closes momentarily when switching from position 2 to
position 3. This contact is not closed in position 2 or position 3.6. Position 1 is an off position.
6. Based on the number of contacts, determine the price of the contactblock assembly below. Prices of operators/handles, legendmarkings, and any accessories are listed on their respective page(s).
POSITIONS
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
The following legend markings are standard for the 45 x 45 mm and60 x 60 mm bezel operators. To order one of these size bezel operators with a standard marking, add the code below of the desired marking as a suffix to the operator type number. Example: 9003 KBC1B 4-3.
1 2
6-1
10
43
2
6-2
HAND AUTO STOP L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
START
STOP START
START
6-6 6-8 6-11 6-12 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33
10
2
120
10
32
10
02
2
1
210
300
0
10
2
1
2
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
4-57 4-58
L1-NL1-L2
L2-L3L3-L1
HANDAUTO
VOLTMETER VOLTMETER
OFF
4-59 4-534 4-535 4-536
4-21 4-23
HAND AUTOMIN. AUTO
MAX.
4-34 4-38 4-43 4-44 4-51 4-54 4-55 4-56
4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20
L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1
0 1
4-1
2
4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10
0 12
3
0 12
3
0
4
12
3
0
45
126
3
0
45
1
1 23
1 23
4
1 23
4
1
5
23
4
1
56
237
4
1
56
2
263
0
45
7 1
374
1 0 0
2
2
3
3 11-
2
2-3
3-1
1OFF
AMMETER
OFF
2 31
56
8 2 012
AUTO0
12
3
L1L2
L3
L1-L2L2-L3L1-L3
L1-NL2-NL3-N
021
10 2 2
1 3
120 1
2
0
1.2
0
L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1
L1-N0
L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1
L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1
0L1-NL2-NL3-N
0L1-NL2-NL3-N
L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1
0
1
2
3
0
9-1
0
9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-10 9-14 9-30
01
3
24 1
0
6-34
0
6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39
60° Marking
45° Marking
0 1
3-1
10
456 67
832
3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10
30° Marking
90° Marking
1START
L2
L1L3
START
0
12
4
L3
L2
L1
L3
L2
L1
L4 12
10
457
8392
6
10
457
839
10 2
6
10
457
839
1011
21 0 21
567 78
943
21
568
94103
7
21
568
9410
11 3
7
21
568
9410
1112
3
Special Markings
All other legend engraving is considered special. To order, clearlyindicate the position of the desired marking. See below for the maximumcharacters allowed on a specially engraved legend.
Rectangular Legends
Type LegendSize
For OperatorSize
Maximum# CharactersPer Position
900101Q900101R900101W
26 x 19 mm – 7
900101V9003KZ33 37 x 22 mm – 11
9003KZ119003KZ139003KZ76
42 x 13 mm 45 x 45 mm 12
9003KZ159003KZ77 57 x 27 mm 60 x 60 mm 17
Square Legends
Type For BezelSize
LegendSize
Maximum# CharactersPer Position
KZ17KAC1BKAE1BKAC1S
KZ18KZ19KBC1BKBE1B
KBC1SKCC1LKCE1L
45 x 45 mm 42 x 42 mm 3
KZ20KAD1CKAF1CKAF2FKAD1S
KZ21KZ22KBD1CKBF1CKBF2F
KBD1SKCD1MKCF1MKCF2R
60 x 60 mm 57 x 57 mm 5
KZ23KAG2GKAG2H
KZ24KZ25KBG2G
KBG2HKCG2TKCG2U
90 x 90 mm 87 x 87 mm 6
All dimensions in mm. To convert toapproximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.
Positions of engravable locations on blank legends.
Rectangular Legends Square Legends
t
Maximum number of characters for these positions is one (1) less than the listed maximum in the chart above.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
The door interlock mounting radius is the length of the radius between the center of the mounting hole of the operator/handle and the pivot point (hinge) of the panel front.
Contact Block Assembly Depth
Numberof Contacts
K2Length
a
t
mm
K3Length
a
t
mm
K4, K5Length
a
t
mm
K6Length
a
t
mm
K7Length
a
t
mm
K8Length
a
t
mm
K9Length
a
t
mm
1-2 52.5 50.5 58.5 64.5 67.5 77.5 120.5
3-4 62.5 63 74.5 86.5 86.5 106.5 192.5
5-6 72.5 76 90.5 108.5 105.5 135.5 264.5
7-8 82.5 89 106.5 130.5 124.5 164.5 –
9-10 92.5 102 122.5 152.5 143.5 193.5 –
11-12 102.5 115 138.5 174.5 162.5 222.5 –
13-14 112.5
t
Dimension
a
for the 9003K2 is for 4 hole mounting operator/handle. Add 18 mm to dimension a when using single hole mount operator/handles.
The MAGELiS XBT is a state-of-the-art industrial operator interface product line. It comprises three families—XBTH message displays, XBTP operatorterminals, and XBTE operator terminals—designed for machine builders, panel makers, and end users.From a simple 2 x 20 character display to a 24 function key 4 x 40 character terminal, many flexible solutions are available to meet the customer's needs.MAGELiS XBT products have a unique design—combining good looks, ergonomics, and practicality— providing unsurpassed value in terms of price andperformance. Windows software-based configuration software, simple page concept programming (messages and alarms), and downloadablecommunication protocols make the MAGELiS XBT an outstanding choice for globally accepted, low cost operator interfaces.
MAGELiS Operator Terminals
Offer flexible solutions with a wide range of features.
Maximize access to information through simple keypad prompting.
Allow customization of function keys and front panel.
Utilize downloadable protocols for ease of installation and support.
Provide LCD and fluorescent displays based on cost and performance needs.
MAGELiS Software
Allows design of effective operator messages, prompting, and data entry.
Provides simple WYSIWYG configuration tools, on-line help, and examples.
Benefits designer with integrated alarming and communication setup.
Offer flexible solutions with a wide range of features.
Maximizes development with multi-language support.
Compliments application training with on-line simulation.
MAGELiS XBT operator terminals meet the requirements of the European Machinery Directive for function keys, symbols, icons, alarm handling, andability to structure information. MAGELiS XBT operator terminals carry the CE mark.
European Machinery Directive: 89/655 EEC: Minimum Health and Safety Regulations for the Protection of Machine Operators.Low Voltage Equipment: IEC 947-1, General Electrical Requirements
IEC 947-5, Control Equipment and Switching Devices
Other relevant standards met: IEC 1131, Programmable ControllersIEC 801, Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial Control EquipmentIEC 255, Electrical RelaysIEC 529, Degree of Protection Provided by EnclosuresIEC 68, Environmental Testing
Square D, Groupe Schneider is pleased to provide you a complete line of rugged message display terminals. This family of display terminals is availableto meet a host of needs by establishing dialog and simplifying data exchanges between the programmable controller and the operator. With featuresranging from simple message readouts to user-programmable function keys, operators may adjust machine parameters through direct communications.
Some of the key features offered as a part of the XBT line are listed below. XBTs have been designed with the industrial environment in mind.
MAGELiS Message Displays, Terminals, and Configuration Software (XBTH, P, and E) Refer to page 204
MAGELiS XBT industrial message displays and operator terminals are suitable to most any automation application. The product lin e can adaptto almost any control system environment—from nano to micro to larger PLC systems of varying brands.
MAGELiS Message Displays:
XBTH: 2-line x 20 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 4 Service Keys, 4 Function Keys, or No Keys.
XBTH: 2-line x 20 characters - LCD Type, available with 4 Service Keys, 4 Function Keys, or No Keys.
Store up to 200 messages.
MAGELiS Operator Terminals:
XBTP: 2-line x 20 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 9 Service Keys, 8 or 12 Function Keys.
XBTP: 2-line x 20 characters - LCD Type, available with 9 Service Keys, 8 or 12 Function Keys.
Store up to 400 messages.
XBTE: 2-line or 4-line x 40 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 10 Service Keys, 24 Function Keys.
XBTE: 2-line or 4-line x 40 characters - LCD Type, available with 10 Service Keys, 24 Function Keys.
XBTL1***: Downloadable protocols: Modbus®, Uni-Telway, Siemens, etc.
This family of XBT products is configured through a single, Windows® software-based package, reducing your investment and installation costs.
Message Displays (XBTK, XBTM) Refer to page 210
The XBTK and XBTM are Square D's single and two line display units. Display units establish one-way communication between the operatorand the machine. Messages contain machine status or fault indication.
XBTK: 1-Line x 20 1/2-inch characters.
XBTM: 1-Line x 10 1-inch characters, 2-Line x 21 1/2-inch characters.
Store up to 600 messages.
Operator Terminals (XBTA) Refer to page 212
The XBT-A operator terminal establishes two-way dialog between the operator and the machine for monitoring and adjusting systemparameters.
1-line display of 16 characters.
8-12 Function Keys, 12 Edit Keys, 3 Service Keys.
Store up to 250 messages.
As you will see, Square D offers a full range of industrial grade message displays and terminals. From the simple display devices through moresophisticated operator terminals, Square D can be your single source supplier for message displays and terminals. For specific ordering informationand pricing, contact your local Square D Field Office.
XBTH/P/E message displays and terminalsavailable :- no operating system- no protocol- no application
+XBTL1000 configuration software used withcompatible PC to:- select the XBT-H/P display unit or terminal- select the protocol used- design an application on screen- simulate the functions with the control system- download the application
+XBTL downloadable communication protocols :- operating system of downloadable products- downloadable applications.
Design:- of application pages- of alarm pages
Configuration:- Windows compatible software- user-friendly- “WYSIWYG” type entry
(what you see is what you get)
Message Displays or terminals:- Automatic execution of commands transmitted
by the PLC
PLC:- Programming communication configured
by dialogue table
Product Line
Communication
Application
XBT-L1000
UTW
Compatible PC
MOD
UNI-TELWAY Siemens Modbus/Jbus
XBTH
+
Pg 2
Pg 1Pg 0
Pg 3
XBTP
Dialog Table
Pg 3TEMPERATURESPEED
Pg 2MAINTENANCE
Pg 0AUTOMATICOPERATION
Pg 1MACHINE ADJUSTMENT
TSX07
+
Design of the XBTH/P/E range of message displays and terminals
The XBTH/P/E range of message displays and terminals comprise 3 families of products :
• XBTH display units- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display- 2 lines of 20 characters- With or without function keys- 128/256 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 200
application pages (approx), 256 available alarmpages
- Optional Printer/Log function
• XBTP terminals- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display- 2 lines of 20 characters- Function and service keys- 256 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 400 application
pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages- Optional Printer/Log function
• XBTE terminals- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display- 2 or 4 lines of 40 characters- Function, service and alphanumeric keys- 384 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 800 application
pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages- Optional Printer/Log function
Description
XBTH/P/E message displays and terminals comprise :Front panel :
1 2 indicator LEDs
2 Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display
3 Function keys with LED, and removable,customizable legend
Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixelsper character), height 5 mm or LCDbacklit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.- 2 lines of 20 characters (scrolling to 25).
Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixelsper character), height 5 mm or LCDbacklit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.- 2 lines of 20 characters (scrolling to 25).
Flat membrane keypad with tactilefeedback and 2 mm travel.- 1 version without keys- 4 function keys + 1 service key- 5 service keys
Flat membrane keypad with tactilefeedback and 2 mm travel.- 8 function keys + 9 service keys- 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys
- 2 system indicator LEDs- 7 service key LEDs- 8-12 function key LEDs
Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixelsper character), height 5 mm or LCDbacklit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.- 2 lines of 40 characters (scrolling to 25)- 4 lines of 40 characters (scrolling to 25)
Flat membrane keypad with tactilefeedback and 2 mm travel.- 24 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 alphanumeric keys
- 2 system indicator LEDs- 7 service key LEDs- 24 function key LEDs- 1 buzzer
14 segment fluorescent green, height10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.- 1 line of 16 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 32).
3 operator guide inputs(external buttons)
4 system indicator lamps
SRAM with 5 year lithium batterybackup, holding 160 or 180 messagesof 20 characters.
EEPROM cartridge, size 24K:600 messages of 21 charactersLog RAM with backup:100 messages of 21 characters
27 key keypad with tactile feedbackand 2 mm travelNumeric models:- 12 programmable function keys- 12 numeric input keys- 3 service keys.Alphanumeric models:- 27 alphanumeric input keys- Flat 12 key keypad (F1 to F12 with LED) with covering membrane.
EEPROM holding 100 messages of16 characters.
1 buzzer
Operator Terminals
14 segment fluorescent green, height10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.- 1 line of 20 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 40).
Fluorescent green matrix display(128 x 20 pixels)- 1 line of 10 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 40) height 20 mm, legible from up to 8 m.- 2 lines of 21 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 2 x 84) height 10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.
Message Displays
Display
Keyboard
Signalling
Memory
Parallel linkRS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485 asynchronous serial link
Asynchronous serial link
Built-in and backed up by removablelithium battery.
RS 232C serial link
ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY/SYMAX®/MODBUS
ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY
Transmission
Real-time clock
Printer
Protocols
For selection Refer to page 210 Refer to page 210 Refer to page 212
XBTK1-line display
XBTA1-line display(keypad with tactile feedback)Compact flush-mounting
Type of display unit XBTH0 •2•10 (fluorescent) XBTH0 •1010 (back-lit LCD)
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
Product approvals UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087 UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01 CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01
Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C) 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) -4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 IP 65, conforming to IEC 529NEMA and UL Type 4 NEMA and UL Type 4
Mechanical characteristics
Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick) (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)
Material Enclosure Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)Keypad Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester
Electrical characteristics
Display Fluorescent green matrix for each character, Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),(5x7 pixels) 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm
Keys - 1 version with no keys (XBTH002010) - 1 version with no keys (XBTH001010)- 4 function keys + 1 service key (XBTH022010) - 4 function keys + 1 service key (XBTH021010)- 5 service keys (XBTH012•10) - 5 service keys (XBTH011010)
Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent)Download- Possible Supply Language Number of Reference Weightable links voltage version keysexchangeprotocol Vdc lb (kg)
Refer to No printer 24 Multilingual No keys XBTH002010 1.3 (0.6)page 214 port
No log
4 function keys XBTH022010 1.3 (0.6)1 service key
5 service keys XBTH012010 1.3 (0.6)
Printer 24 Multilingual 5 service keys XBTH012110 1.3 (0.6)portand log
Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD)Download- Possible Supply Language Number of Reference Weightable links voltage version keysexchangeprotocol Vdc
lb (kg)
Refer to No printer 24 Multilingual No keys XBTH001010 1.3 (0.6)page 214 port
No log
4 function keys XBTH021010 1.3 (0.6)1 service key
5 service keys XBTH011010 1.3 (0.6)
Documentation (to be ordered separately)
Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E XBTX000US 0.4(0.2)(1)
(1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documention in French, DE in German, ES in Spanishand 1T in Italian.
Type of terminal XBTP0 •2•10 (fluorescent) XBTP0 •1•10 (back-lit LCD)
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
Product approvals UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087 UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01 CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01
Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C) 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) -4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 IP 65, conforming to IEC 529NEMA and UL Type 4 NEMA and UL Type 4
Mechanical characteristics
Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick) (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)
Material Enclosure Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)
Display Fluorescent green matrix for each character, Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),(5x7 pixels) 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm
Keys - 8 function keys + 9 service keys (XBTP012010) - 8 function keys + 9 service keys (XBTP011010)- 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric - 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys keys(XBTP022•10) (XBTP021•10)
Memory - 256 kb Flash EEPROM - 256 kb Flash EEPROM- 400 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 400 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page
Log function Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
Transmission RS 232/RS 485/RS 422 RS 232/RS 485/RS 422(asynchronous serial link)Downloadable protocol Multiple (see page 214) Multiple (see page 214)
Real-time clock Access to PLC real-time clock Access to PLC real-time clock
Printer port RS 232 (XBTP022110) RS 232 (XBTP021110)(asynchronous serial link)Relay – –
Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent)Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Num. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)
Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD)Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Num. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)
Type of terminal XBTE014 •10/XBTE016•10 (fluorescent) XBTE013 •10/XBTE015•10 (back-lit LCD)
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
Product approvals UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087 UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01 CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01
Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C) 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) -4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 IP 65, conforming to IEC 529NEMA and UL Type 4 NEMA and UL Type 4
Mechanical characteristics
Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 m thick) (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 m thick)
Material Enclosure Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)
Display Fluorescent green matrix for each character (5x7 pixels) Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),- 2 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm - 2 lines of 40 characters, height 9 mm- 4 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm - 4 lines of 40 characters, height 9 mm
Keys - 24 function keys - 24 function keys- 10 service keys - 10 service keys- 12 alphanumeric keys - 12 alphanumeric keys
Memory - 384 kb Flash EEPROM - 384 kb Flash EEPROM- 800 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 800 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page- 400 application pages (approx) of 4 lines per page - 400 application pages (approx) of 4 lines per page- 128 available alarm pages of 4 lines per page - 128 available alarm pages of 4 lines per page
Log function Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
Terminals with 2 lines of 40 characters (fluorescent)Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Alphanum. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)No printer port, no log
Terminals with 4 lines of 40 characters (fluorescent)
Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Alphanum. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)No printer port, no log
Terminals with 2 lines of 40 characters (back-lit LCD)
Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Alphanum. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)No printer port, no log
Terminals with 4 lines of 40 characters (back-lit LCD)
Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Alphanum. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)No printer port, no log
Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C) 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)
Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 IP 65, conforming to IEC 529
Mechanical characteristicsType of mounting and fixing Flush-mounting by 2 retractable fasteners Flush-mounting by 2 retractable fasteners
Enclosure Zinc alloy. Front panel coated with black Zinc alloy. Front panel coated with blacksatin-finish polyurethane paint satin-finish polyurethane paint
Electrical characteristics
Display Fluorescent green, 14 segment Fluorescent green matrix (128 x 20 pixels)- 1 line of 20 characters, height 10 mm - 1 line of 10 characters, height 20 mm
- 2 lines of 21 characters, height 10 mm
Power supply Voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
Voltage limits 18 to 30 Vdc 18 to 30 Vdc
Ripple 25 % maximum 25 % maximum
Consumption 10 W 25 W
Operating characteristics
Visual signalling – 4 system indicator lights
Memory Messages SRAM with 5 year lithium battery backup EEPROM cartridge 160 or 180 messages of 20 chars. (depending on model) 24 K bytes : 600 messages of 21 characters
Log – RAM with lithium battery backup100 messages of 21 characters
Protocol ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY (depending on model) ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY
Real-Time Clock – Yes, with lithium battery back-up
Printer link – RS 232C(Asynchronous serial link)Relays – 1 N/O contact (min. 1 mA/5 Vdc, max. 0.5 A/24 Vdc)
Cabling Power supply and Plug-in terminal block Power supply and relays:parallel link 17 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch) Plug-in terminal block with 5 screw terminals (5.08 mm
1-line display units (1 x 20 characters)Data Possible links Supply Language Reference Weightexchange voltage versionprotocol VDC lb (kg)
ASCII No printer link 24 Multilanguage XBTK801010 4.2 (1.9)ADJUST No real-time clockUNI-TELWAY
Display units with 1 line (1 x 10 characters) or 2 lines (2 x 21 characters)
ASCII No printer link 24 Multilanguage XBTM801010 5.3 (2.4)ADJUST No real-time clockUNI-TELWAY No operator guide
ASCII With printer link 24 Multilanguage XBTM804110 5.3 (2.4)ADJUSTUNI-TELWAY
Note:XBTM display units are supplied without a TSXMC70E324 EEPROM memory cartridge. Memory cartridges mustbe ordered separately. (Refer to Software and Accessories on page 214).
Flush-mounting compact terminals, keypad with tactile feedbackData Function keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Number Marked voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)ASCIIADJUST 12 F1 to F12 24 Multilanguage XBTA801010 4.3 (1.95)UNI-TELWAY without LED
Description Compatibility Language Operating Reference Weightversion system lb (kg)
Configuration XBT•3 Multilingual (2) DOS XBTL100 1.4 (0.65)and terminal XBT•7/•8 Multilingual Windows XBTL900 1.4 (0.65)software DOS XBTL100 1.4 (0.65)
XBT•4 Multilingual Windows XBTL900 1.4 (0.65)DOS XBTL400 1.4 (0.65)
XBT•4/•7/•8 Multilingual X-TEL (V4 and V5)XBTL940 1.4 (0.65)
Configuration software XBTH/P/E Multilingual Windows XBTL1000 1.4 (0.65)for display unitsand terminals(1) XBTL software is supplied in an A5 box including a user's guide and one or two installation diskettes : one 5“1/4and one 3“1/2 (XBTL900), one 3"1/2 (XBTL940/L1000). (2) English, Spanish, French, German, Italian.
Downloadable protocols (for use with XBTL1000 software)Type of protocol Compatibility Reference WeightAllen-Bradley XBTH/P/E XBTL1AB01 lb (kg)Omron XBTH/P/E XBTL1OMR01UNI-TELWAY XBTH/P/E XBTL1UTW01 1.4 (0.65)Modbus XBTH/P/E XBTL1MOD01 1.4 (0.65)Siemens XBTH/P/E XBTL1SIE01 1.4( 0.65)
InterfacesConnection Link Compatibility Mounting Reference Weight
Connection cables for XBTH/P/EPort Transmission Connection Compatibility Length Catalog numberRS 232C PC/PS 9-pin (male) Any XBT (3) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ915
programming 25-pin (female) Any XBT (3) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ90525-pin (male) Any XBT (3) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ9052
ASCII – Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ905Serial printer Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ936XBT/XBTZ961 Any XBT (1) 6.6 (2) XBTZ933
Current loop ASCII – Any XBT 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ906RS 485 UNI-TELWAY TSXSCA 62 Any XBT (1) 5.9 (1.8) XBTZ908
TSXSCM 21•6 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ918TSXP•••425 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ948TSXSCG 1161 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ928TSX17 XBTH/P/E 16.4 (5) XBTZ958
Plug TSX07/37 Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ968(1) Including XBTH/P/E terminals(2) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.(3) For XBTH/P/E in version V2.2.
Cables for Open Protocol for XBTH/P/EPort/Transmission Connection Compatibility Length Catalog numberRS 232/RS 485 25-pin (male)-RJ45 XBTH/P/E 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ915RS 232 25-pin male-5 pin XBTH/P/E 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ909
male
SUB-D Adaptors for Open ProtocolAdaptor Connection Compatibility Catalog numberFemale adaptor RJ45-25 pin female XBTZ900 XGVSZ2510Female adaptor RJ45-9 pin female XBTZ900 XGVSZ0910Male adaptor RJ45-9 pin male XBTZ900 XGVSZ0920Male adaptor RJ45-15 pin male XBTZ900 XGVSZ1520Male adaptor RJ45-25 pin male XBTZ900 XGVSZ2520RS232/Current Loop 25 pinmale-25 pin XBTZ939 XBTZ939
(1) Including XBTH/P/E terminals.(2) Add the XBTZ939 module for XBTKL/KN/ML.(3) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.(4) For XBTH/P/E in version V2.2.
Compatibility Table for Protocols/Cables for MAGELiSTM
PLC PLC Model Connection XBT Status Protocol Protocol Name Type of Type of CableSeries Type (Part Number) to Install Physical Layer Connection PLCTELE TSX07 Terminal Port Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 2.0 RS 485 DIN XBTZ968
Resistance of Chemical Agents Concentration Temperature Enclosure KeypadPolyester
PPO • PET ••ACIDS
Nitric Acid 10% +20 °C S LSulfuric Acid 50% +20 °C S NCitric Acid 10% +20 °C S S
Chloric Acid 50% +20 °C S SALCOHOLS
Ethanol 100% +20 °C S SGlycol 100% +20 °C ? S
Methanol 100% +20 °C L LHYDROCARBONS
Hexan 100% +20 °C S SGasoline, Fuels 100% +20 °C N S
Grease 100% +20 °C S SHydraulic Oils 100% +20 °C S SCutting Oils 100% +20 °C S SSOLVENTS
Trichlorethylene 100% +20 °C N LTrichlorethane 100% +20 °C N L
Acetone 100% +20 °C N LWhite Spirits 100% +20 °C L S
AGRO-CULTURAL PRODUCTSVegetable Oils 100% +20 °C S SAnimals Fats 100% +20 °C L SFruit Juices 100% +20 °C ? ?
Milk (Lactic Acid) 100% +20 °C S SS: Satisfactory for the temperature indicatedL: Limited for the temperature indicatedN: Non-satisfactory?: Unknown, testing required• Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)•• Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester
The XBTA series of flat keyboards with covering membrane has been subjected to trials in collaboration withDIVERSEY and HENKEL HYGIENE, whose detergents and disinfectant products are commonly used in the agri-foodstuffs industry.Under normal conditions of use, the XBTA series of flat keyboards with covering membrane suffered no ill-effects after200 hours being immersed in the following products :
DIVERSEY detergent and disinfectant productsSEPTINEIGE PLUS Self-lathering disinfecting neutral detergent, 1 to 4% and 20 °C.DIVOSAN MEZZO Broad spectrum oxidizing acid disinfectant, 0.5% and 20 °C.DILAC NEIGE Self-lathering acid detergent, 3 to 5% and 20 °C.DIVONEIGE ML Self-lathering mild alkaline detergent, 2 to 5% and 20 °C.CHLORINEIGE 400 Chlorinated self-lathering alkaline detergent, 1 to 5% and 20 °C.
HENKEL HYGIENE detergent and disinfectant productsP3 - FORMAKLAR Broad spectrum non-oxidizing neutral disinfectant, tested at 4 % and 20 °C.P3 - OXONIA ACTIF Strong oxidizing disinfectant, tested at 0.5% and 20 °C.P3 - TOPAX M ACIDE Self-lathering acid disinfectant, tested at 2% and 40 °C.P3 - TOPAX M 55 Chlorinated self-lathering disinfecting alkaline detergent, tested at 5 % and 50 °C.P3 - HOROLITH M Self-lathering acid detergent, tested at 5% and 20 °C.
(1) Dimensions for support cut-out: (1) Dimensions for support cut-out:276 x 61.5 ±0.5 mm(10.87 x 2.42 ± 0.02 in) 275.5 x 88.5 ± 0.5 mm.(10.85 x 3.48 ± 0.02 in)
(2) Support thickness: from 1.5 to 6 mm. (0.06 to 0.24 in.) (2) Support thickness: from 1.5 to 6 mm. (0.06 to 0.24 in)Terminals
XBTA
(1) Dimensions for support cut-out: 231 x 145.5 ± 0.5 mm. (9.09 x 5.73 ± 0.02 in)(2) Support thickness: 10 mm (0.39 in)
Type Language ASCII + ADJUST UNI-TELWAY MULTI-PROTOCOL
XBTH/P/E French XBTX000FRterminals German XBTX000DE
English XBTX000USSpanish XBTX000ESItalian XBTX000IT
XBTK French XBTXK700F XBTXK800Fmessage displays German XBTXK700D XBTXK800D
English XBTXK700E XBTXK800ESpanish XBTXK700S XBTXK800SItalian XBTXK700T XBTXK800T
XBTM French XBTXM800Fmessage displays German XBTXM800D
English XBTXM800ESpanish XBTXM800SItalian XBTXM800T
XBTA French XBTX63255 XBTXA800Fterminals German XBTX63257 XBTXA800D
English XBTX63256 XBTXA800ESpanish XBTX63258 XBTXA800SItalian XBTX63259 XBTXA800T
XBT Terminal French XBTXD800 FRUtilization German XBTXD800 DEHandbook English XBTXD800 EN
Spanish XBTXD800 ESItalian XBTXD800 1T
XBT installation bulletins supplied with the product are in English. If additional technical manuals or specific catalogs areneeded, they may be purchased separately.
For specific ordering information and pricing regarding the products shown in this catalog, contact your localSquare D Field Office.
Control system architecturesBy remotely downloading protocols from a variety of manufacturers, MAGELiS terminals can easily be integrated with many popular PLCs. Remoteloading of protocols also provides:
minimum stock with maximum effectiveness.
convenient updating of installed base of products and protocols as new versions are introduced.
declare under our own responsibility that the products(s):
TRADEMARK: TELEMECANIQUENAME, TYPE:
Display units
MODELS: XBT-K, -KL, -M,-KN, -HL, -HNAME, TYPE:
Operator dialogue terminals with keypad LEDs
MODELS: XBT-BBNAME, TYPE:
Operator dialogue terminals
MODELS: XBT-A, -E, -PNAME, TYPE:
Operator dialogue terminals
MODELS: XBT-VA, -VM
to which this declaration refers conform to :
STANDARDS OR NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS:
Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear,General rules IEC 947-1 (EN60947-1)Programmable controllers IEC 1131Electromagnetic compatibility EN 50081-2
Subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to its (their) intended purpose, to the applicable regulations and standards, to the supplier’s instructions and to standard practice,the products conform to the requirements of the applicable European Directives:
Low-voltage Directive N
°
73/23/EECEMC Directive N
°
89/336/EEC
The CE mark on the products and/or their packaging signifies that Schneider Electric holds thereference technical file available to the European Union authorities.
Done at ANGOULEME : 28 November 1995 Authorized Signatory
Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear,General rules IEC 947-1 (EN60947-1)Electromechanical control circuit devices IEC 947-5-1 (EN60947-5-1)
Subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to its (their) intended purpose, to the applicable regulations and standards, to the supplier’s instructions and to standard practice,the products conform to the requirements of the applicable European Directives:
Low-voltage Directive N
°
73/23/EECEMC Directive N
°
89/336/EEC
The CE mark on the products and/or their packaging signifies that Schneider Electric holds thereference technical file available to the European Union authorities.
Done at ANGOULEME : 28 November 1995 Authorized Signatory
Selector Switches, Pilot Lights and Contact Blocks.
Provided that the said products are installed, maintained and used in the application for which they were made, in accordance withcurrently accepted professional practices, relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions,
complies with the provisions of Council Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EECAmendment 1 93/68/EEC
EMC Directive 89/336/EECAmendments 91/263/EEC
92/31/EEC93/68/EEC
The above product is in conformity with the following standards:
BS EN 60947-1Underwriters Laboratory UL 508
National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS 1 and ICS 2Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Provided that the said products are installed, maintained and used in the application for which they were made, in accordance withcurrently accepted professional practices, relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions,
complies with the provisions of Council Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EECAmendment 1 93/68/EEC
The above product is in conformity with the following standards:
BS EN 60947-1Underwriters Laboratory UL 508
National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS 1 and ICS 2Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
MANUFACTURER’SDECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
WE: Square D Company
128 Bingham Road
Asheville, NC 28802
Declare that the products:
BRAND: SquareDNAME, TYPE: Class 9001, Type KM, KMF, “Light Modules”
“ “ , Type KA, “Contact Blocks”“ “ , Type K, KX, SK, SKRU, “30 mm Operators”“ “ , Type BW, SKYP “Pendant Stations”
Class 9002, Type AW, “Foot Switches”
To which this declaration refers are in conformity with:
The following Standards or Normative Documents:
- General rules: EN60947.1- Electromechanical control circuit devices: EN60947.5.1
subject to installation, maintenance and utilization in accordance with their purpose, regulations, current standards, manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.
Meet the provisions of the following Directives:
No. 73/23/CCE of
February 19, 1973, named Low-voltage Directive, modified by Directive 93/68/E
C
of July 22, 1993.
No. 89/336/CEE of May 3, 1989, named Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive,modified by Directives 92/31/CEE of April 28, 1992 and 93/68/CEE of July 22, 1993.
The CE marking on the product and/or the packaging signifies that Square D holds thereference technical file available to the European Authorities.
Executed at Raleigh:
October 22, 1997
Authorized Signature:
Name: Neil TollasPosition: Director, Logic ControlSignature:
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
BRAND: TelemecaniqueNAME, TYPE: XVA LED LAMPSMODELS: XVAD•••B120, XVAD•••C024
To which this declaration refers are in conformity with:
The following Standards or Normative Documents:
- General rules: EN60947.1- Electromechanical control circuit devices: EN60947.5.1
subject to installation, maintenance and utilization in accordance with their purpose, regulations, current standards, manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.
Meet the provisions of the following Directives:
No. 73/23/CCE of
February 19, 1973, named Low-voltage Directive, modified by Directive 93/68/E
C
of July 22, 1993.
No. 89/336/CEE of May 3, 1989, named Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive,modified by Directives 92/31/CEE of April 28, 1992 and 93/68/CEE of July 22, 1993.
The CE marking on the product and/or the packaging signifies that Square D holds thereference technical file available to the European Authorities.
Executed at Raleigh:
April 10, 1997
Authorized Signature:
Name: Neil TollasPosition: Director, Logic ControlSignature:
is a registered trademark of IBM Corporationand are registered trademarks of Underwriters Laboratoryis a registered trademark of Canadian Standard Association
Windows
is a registered trademark of the Microsoft CorporationModbus
is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.SY/MAX
is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.MAGELiS
is a trademark of Schneider Electric SAUNI-TELWAY
is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA X/TEL
is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SATSX 7
is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SAFINGERSAFE
is a registered trademark of Square D Companyis a trademark of Square D Company